Home

USER GUIDE GVSIG 2.2

Contents

1. Let s see one by one all the available tools Icon Tool Shortcut Description gt Clear selection Clean the previously done selection iD Select all Select all the elements of a layer sy Select By Attributes Selects entities based on a query by attribute ES Reverse Reverse selection le Simple Selecting feature by feature O 2015 gvSIG Page 173 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n Ch Select by circle Select features that intersect the circular area defined by the user Select by Layer Spatial selection of features in a layer respect to another a Select by rectangle Select features intersecting the rectangular area defined by the user Select by polygon Select features intersecting the polygonal area defined by the user Select by buffer Selection by area of influence To select the elements of a layer it is required that the layer is active To apply most of the graphic selection tools you should click the left mouse button on the selection starting point then drag and drop to finalize the selection In the case of the simple selection just click on the item you want to select In the case of selection by polygon click on each vertex of the polygon and double click to finalize the selection To add features to an already existing selection you must hold down the Control key while selecting features To unselect one or more selected feat
2. 454 0 028 7 454 0 010 454 0 009 454 1 564 T 454 0 031 11 7 18 18 454 454 0 040 1 VET NN gE LE ELE LEE el 2 A ai Total of selected records 1 Menus toolbar 2 Button toolbar 3 Table s name This header can be hidden 4 Table 5 Information of the table Reports the total of records that the table contains and how much are selected Fields can be resized visually clicking in border of header and dragging to new position All vector layers have an associated Attribute table Each graphic element of a layer has It s corresponding record in this Attribute table To select a record in table just click with left mouse button Using keys Control and Shift and clicking it s possible to select different records To select a field of the table you must click with mouse left button on field header 2015 gvSIG Page 315 of 371 9 gvsic gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n 58 ADD A TABLE 58 1 Introduction There are two ways to add a table of gvSIG Open the attribute table of a layer From a active layer of a view clicking on button Show attribute table or in menu Layer show attribute table Menu Button Layer HS Attribute editor Query a Export to Export to anotation Z Start editing Modity b E Show attributes table gt Maruern nenmetries 1 Add anew table from Projects Manager 2 Select the tab
3. symbol field Symbol Value E Label E MO 7 0 111 0 7 111 MN 120 0 211 0 120 211 MN 252 0 418 0 252 418 NN 460 0 675 0 460 675 1 0 33 0 1 33 35 0 66 0 35 66 e 77 0 138 0 77 138 1 Fields with values Colour field Drop down to select the field for the intervals legend Graduated symbol field Drop down to select the field for the graduated symbols legend 2 Colour ramp Options for defining the intervals legend Colour ramp will open a new window Fields r Color ramp Classification field EE Begin color a Interval type Natural intervals Nr of intervals End color E F oO Other values In DN 0111 00 7 111 MN 120 0 211 0 120 211 MN 252 0 418 0 252 418 NN 50 0 575 0 460 675 3 Symbol Options for definig the graduated symbols legend Symbol will open a new window O 2015 gvSIG Page 118 of 371 Te eee 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dios asociaci n Fields Symbol Classification field Densidad 26 oz Interval type Natural intervals HE To 14 00 Nr of intervals Other values Template a 1 0 33 0 35 0 66 0 770 1380 4 To modify symbols labels and intervals automatically Permite modificar los s mbolos etiquetas e intervalos calculados de forma autom tica 17 12 Multiple attributes Join Table TO DO 17 13 Multiple attributes Com
4. 1 It allows you to select the fields which will make the attributes table associated to the selected layer 2 Click on Next 5 Options O 2015 gvSIG Page 70 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n Information Layers Fields Options Area WFS protocol version Version a 1 1 0 fei 23 l i Max features l Timeout 55sec w n m E zz z hz a a oe hz z ll Srs y Vectorial cache y Enable cache 4 Orden de los ejes 3 Use axis YX order 5 WES version 1 1 0 0 E i O uu Y Features cache none ee La y Lal 1 WES version 2 Max Features It allows users to set a maximum number of entities that can be downloaded Timeout is the length of time beyond which the connection is rejected as it is considered to be incorrect If these parameters are very low a correct request may not obtain a response 3 SRS CRS of the layer gvSIG reprojects the loaded layer to the spatial system in the view 4 Enable cache 5 Invert the order of X Y axis 6 Inform about the WFS version 7 Once the parameters are selected Click on Next 6 Area 2015 gvSIG Page 71 of 371 O gvSIG 2 2 User guide Information Layers Fields Options Area 1 Selection area in the view s projection Vertex 2 Active Es gvSIG asociaci n 1 It allows you to delimit the area of the View in which the vectorial elements will
5. O Create package symbols Select symbol folder Select the folder to create the package with gvslG Basic lt Back Next gt Cancel In this window we can see all the symbol libraries available in our gvSIG in this case gvSIG Basic which is the default library plus the ones created by the user We can select the library from we want to create the package and click on Next 2015 gvSIG Page 159 of 371 A Te gvSIG 2 2 User guide gvSIG asociaci n A form appears to fill the metadata of the package Create package symbols Plugin description Type E Name Description iS Car LL State final a Official Source code URL Package owner gvSIG Association Package owner URL Operating system Architecture lava version ava 1 5 gvSIG version Dependencies Code alias AN ES DO LS Doo O OOOO Package owner Finish cancel The option Categories must have the categories Symbology Symbols to make easier the localization in Add ons manager Clicking on Next one last window will appear where all the output options must be indicated O 2015 gvSIG Page 160 of 371 Se EEE Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dos asociaci n Output options Select the package location S desktop gvSIG desktop 2 2 0 install gvSIG desktop 2 2 0 symbols new 1 0 1 1 final all all 1_5 gvspkg Do you want to create a package index _ Create in
6. gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG projects have gvsproj extension In File menu are the main tools related to the project We also have the corresponding button bar Menu Button bar El ew project Ctri N 5 pen project Ctri o H save project Ctrl 5 E Save as Ctrl Shift S Open WME A Exit Ctri Q nea Let see every tools available ef Icon Tool Shortcut Description key ia New project Ctrl N Create a new project 5 Open project Ctrl O Open an existing project m Save project Ctrl S Save the session work If you are working with a new project we will request the name by which the project is saved with gvsproj extension If you are working with an existing project update changes the working session Save as Ctri Shift S Save the work session on a new file requesting the name 5 2 Save project changes When a work session in gvSIG closes a window asking if you want to save changes to the project appears 2015 gvSIG Page 29 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 9 gvSIG L asociaci n fs O Save resources Before exiting the selected resources will be saved Unnamed Select all Clear selection OK Discard changes Cancel By default gvSIG have all fields activated about changes that have occurred in the project and then can be saved These changes also make reference to the project show the layers and table
7. Rounding pixels Adjusting to the maximum extension of the layer s ROls Calculates the minimum extension where all Page 250 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n by layer ROIs ROIs are included ol Raster layer zoom Coordinates are assigned to the extension of the to full extent raster mi Select from the Allows to select the clipping area by drawing a view rectangle on the raster The rectangle is drawn by clicking and dragging on the previously active view The area that we draw must be set to the layer you re doing the clipping If otherwise it will be adjusted automatically e Spatial resolution tab o The resolution of the output image can be changed using two methods Method of resolution selection 2 Cell size O Width x Height Interpolation Nearest neighbourhood 7 Restore Cell size Activate the text box cell and is where the value of the new cell size is inserted Width x Height Active Width and High Allows to define the width or height value in the output If we vary the width height and vice versa it will be recalculated automatically o Interpolation Allows to select the interpolation method Nearest Neighborhood Bilinear inverse distance and B Spline o Restore Restores the initial size values of output layer e Bands selection tab List of source raster bands 2015 gvSIG Page 251 of 371 ND O gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69
8. Step 2 Acceptance of licence At the beginning of the set up process a welcome message appears Click Next gvSIG desktop Setup Welcome to the InstallJammer Wizard for evSIG desktop This will install gvSIG desktop version 2 2 0 on your computer It is recommended that you close all other applications before continuing Click Hext to continue or Cancel to exit Setup It shows the gvSIG licence GNU GPL v 3 Click in Agree to the terms of use 2015 gvSIG Page 16 of 371 A 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n gvSIG desktop Setup License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 4 29 June 200 Copyright Ci 200 Free Software Foundation Inc ihttpiFsafF orer gt Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The GHU General Public License is a Free copyleft license for software and other kinds of works The licenses for most software and other practical works are desiened to take away your freedom to share and change the works By contrast the GHU General Public License is intended to guarantee your Freedom to share and change all versions of a prozram to make sure it remains free software for all its users He the Free Software Foundation use the GHU General Public License for most of our softwares it applies also to any other work rel
9. A 0 Air transportation bg Air transportation Arrivals bg Arrivals Baggage check in bg Iii um b4 Baggage check in Baggage lockers bg Baggage lockers Bar bg Bar NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN iga LOlAiga LO2Aiga LO3A liga LO4Aiga LOSAiga LO6Aiga LO Aiga LOSA4Aiga LOSA ga LLOAIga Ll1Aiga 11 24iga LL3Aiga L14Aiga L154iga L16 NNNNNNNN iga L174iga L18Aiga L194iga L20Aiga L2lAiga L22Aiga L234Aiga L24 Aiga 01 Aiga 02 Aiga 03 Aiga 04 Aiga 05 Ter 06 Aiga 07 Aiga 08 Aiga 09 Aiga 10 Aiga 11 TE 12 Aiga 13 Aiga 14 Aiga 15 Aiga 16 Aiga 17 Aiga 18 Aiga 19 Aiga 20 Aiga 21 Aiga 22 Aiga 23 Aiga 24 21 2 Collective Mapping It is a symbology orientated to the collective mapping workshops It is far from the usual symbology for geographic elements lts iconography is orientated to ideological representation This library is based on the Collective mapping tutorial Critical mapping resources for shared mapping in Spanish by Iconoclasistas 14 13 16 17 she wae ry a YN La a es Mes Za ine Eh 2 at amp os oD e O wb es 2 zA oy Ve aoe 30 31 32 a 34 18 19 O 2015 gvSIG Page 148 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide ENNNNNN Lines Lines By F Sy Ba F Ba k ip rn g Fa ir Ta Loa b a Fa t bt ll Bl T f C an gt E 4 2 hd pe a de ae as ie ib de i i in Boundaryl Boundary2Boundary3Boundary4Bounda
10. gvSIG asociaci n C Use appearance requires restart Plastic XP E Metal Nimbus CDE Motif GTK Plastic XP Folders Sets default folders used to access gvSIG projects data map templates and symbol libraries Projects folder Geographycal data folder Template folder Symbol library folder Display settings Configure display settings resolution Measure The length of line above is 5 56 Centimeters Calculate Lets calculate the resolution automatically following steps e Measure with a ruler on the line drawn in the Test Measurement dialog screen e Write in the text box and the measurement obtained and their units e Pressing the Calculate resolution button will automatically provide the default resolution in dots per inch Add ons It provides access to the add ons list activate deactivate and set its priority It is not recommended to change these settings if you are not O 2015 gvSIG Page 36 of 371 Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n an expert on the implications of these changes Language Set the interface language of gvSIG Restart required for proper application Language Variant BBA apckKl Catala e tina Dansk Deutsch EAANVLK English English United States Espa ol Basque Persian Francais Gallegan Italiano Khmer Polski 4 Portugu s IF you would like to help with the
11. 2015 gvSIG 69 gvSIG lasociaci n two efects It loads the same image in the locator map and opens a new window where there is a higher zoom level and where users can see the image values in real time It allows to navigate between the levels of resolution of the raster It creates a multifile layer It allows to apply a transformation to the raster using the method of the principal components It allows to apply a transformation to the raster using the method of the Tasseled cap It allows users the application of digital filters It allows the alteration of the digital levels of the image through functions to adjust them to certain process It allows the definition of linear piecewise linear and non linear functions It allows to generate Masks from ROIs It allows the change to the projection of the raster layer It allows to apply a related transformation to an image translation rotation and inclination manually no need of control points There won t be any information about the precision It sets the projection of the view to the raster It allows to endow coordinates to an image pixel coordinates It allows to export a clip view as a georeferenced raster Page 211 of 371 Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n Save as Ctrl Alt 5S It allows to save the raster as a new file H Clipping Ctrl Alt C It allows users to make an extraction of the imag
12. Composite It provides gvSIG users with the possibility to represent two CRS with transformations different datums without the transformation between those two CRS but with a transformation of those two CRS into a third CRS In this case the composite transformation can play an important role when you need to define two transformations one that refers to the CRS of the layer and the other to the CRS that has been defined for the view With this mechanism you can set the CRS for the layer and the CRS of the View through an intermediate CRS that connects the two CRS To do this after selecting the CRS of the layer and setting the type of transformation to Compound transformation you need to 1 Define the transformation to be applied to the CRS of the layer 2015 gvSIG Page 57 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide C 2 gvSIG asociaci n 2 Define the transformation to be applied to the CRS of the view rTransformations CRS of the layer EPSG 23030 Layer transformation EPSG Transformation rEPSG transformation Transformation name Transform EDSO ta WGS 84 38 transform ED50 to WGS 84 37 transform EDSO to WGS 84 1 transform EDSO to WGS 84 2 transform EDSO to WGS 84 3 transform EDSO ta WGS 84 4 transform EDSO to WGS 84 5 transform Description of the area 4326 Israel and Palestine Te 4326 Jordan 4326 Austria Belgium Denm
13. 4326 Austria Denmark Fran 4326 Iraq Israel Jordan Leb 4326 Cyprus onshore and 4326 Egypt Western Desert 11 3 Adding a WMS The steps to add a WMS through the Add layer window are 1 Connecting to the service o Ad F File WME WE WES WMTS GeoDB OSM PostGIS Raster Server Refresh cache Use of local tile cache Assume coordinates follow X ans order Connect Description y Name t J Remote sensing Z 5 NASA Earth Observations NEO 1 Select the WMS tab 2015 gvSIG Page 58 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n 2 Introduce the server URL which will be stored and it will be shown in the pull down menu for the future 3 Click on Connect 4 When the connection is made a welcome message from the server appears not always 5 The WMS version number that the connection has been made to is shown at the bottom of the box 6 When the connection is made the Next button is enabled We click on it to begin with the configuration of the layer You can select the Refresh cache option which will search for the server information in the local host This will only work if the same server was used on a previous occasion 2 Information It shows information from the server Information Layers Styles Dimensions Formats Service information server hittpv neowms sci
14. Only on visualization 2 New Layer O Create file 0 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 Open in memory MNewLayer 1 Operation Lineal Drawed Line Band Red Type Standard Apply Close Cancel 1 In the central part two graphs are shown The left is the histogram of the input image and the selected graphic On the right it is the histogram will have the output image The graphs represented with a yellow line can be modified graphically by clicking and dragging with the primary mouse button Changing the input histogram graph will get vary the output histogram and the preview In the upper corners of the input histogram graph maximum and minimum values for the raster are displayed At the bottom the maximum and minimum values being applied at that moment for the enhancement function appears The value in percentage relative to the total data set appears in parentheses These values can be modified by clicking and dragging on two vertical dotted lines that are in the sides of the graph The left line will modify the minimum and the right the maximum Breakpoints are inserted by clicking with the mouse on the graph at the point where you want to insert To delete a point we will stand over it and will press right mouse button After entering a breakpoint can change its position by dragging it RGB When this is activated it considers that raster data are displayed RGB data type is byte value range 0 255 If this i
15. AY k T i i A NNN N D i W Border AAA AAA Roadl Road Road3 Streetl Street2 O 2015 gvSIG Page 153 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide Green Mountain POI Station Urbanl Urban2 Water 21 12 Military APP6 This library has all the symbols which are part of the APP6 standard used by the Defence sector This library is based on the document Commented APP 6A Military symbols for land based systems Defence Research and Development Canada Valcartier Technical Notel DRDC Valcartier TN 2005 222 Arrest 1 Arrest 2 Arrest 3 Arrest 4 Drug 1 ES gt 3 Drug 2 Drug 3 Drug 4 Area Friend Friendly Hostile Suspect Hostile Neutral 1 Neutral 2 Unknown Pending Unknown Weather 1 Weather 2 S Hijacking Airplanes 1Hijacking Airplanes 2 21 13 Navigational Symbology used for maritime shipping and nautical charts This symbol library is based on the symbology used by the IHO International Hydrographic Organization and the ECDIS Electronic Chart Display and Information System Airport Anchorage area Anchorage point Anchorage singleberth Berth Built up Cairn Cairn2 ri f PA ni an fa oy NY FN o NY WS Pa q ki A Pi tF Aerial cableway Bridge Coastline Coastline 2 Elevation contour Embankment Line of trees f j NY n Pa 4 b N Xx A YA 4 w f A Fd ri Rapids Road Traffic separation Tr
16. When the geoprocess finishes the new layer will be included in the TOC 41 4 Convex Hull This geoprocess calculates the Convex hull or convex polygon of the less area which involves all the vector elements of the input layer E WS ee e Bp o e to The interface is Inputs Vector layer Input layer hidro andalucia Options Selected features Input cover a Outputs Convex Hull vector Save to temporary file a 1 Input layer 2 Selected features Input layer Option to use only the selected features When the geoprocess finishes the new layer will be included in the TOC 2015 gvSIG Page 265 of 371 A gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide le asociacion To clip a vector layer points lines or polygons using other layer as clip layer 41 5 Clip The geoprocess will go over all the vector features of the input layer and with all of them inside of the area defined by the clip layer will calculate their intersections In the output layer only those will be present The portion of feature out of the work area will be deleted The interface is Inputs Vector layer ra ayn provincias andalucia a Options Selected features Input cower di Selected features Clip cover da Outputs A Save to temporary fiel a Clip_line vector Save to temporary file fa Clip_point vector Save to temporary file 1 Input layer To select the layer to clip 2 Cl
17. cr D gi 4 Save to temporary file Save to temporary file Save to temporary Tile 2 Selected features Input layer Option to use only the selected features 2015 gvSIG Page 267 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n C When the geoprocess finishes the new layer will be included in the TOC 41 8 Difference 3 Shift in X and Y This geoprocess known as NOT Spatial allows to get the areas of one layer that are not found in another layer The features in both layers can be polygons lines or points e go The interface is r inputs Vector layer Input layer provincias andalucia O x Intersection cower hidro andalucia Options z Selected features Input cover d Selected features Overlay cover d rOutputs AOS _ _ al Difference polygon vector Save to temporary file Pr Difference line vector Save to temporary file Pr Difference point vector Save to temporary file Ud 1 Input layer 2 Intersection cover 3 Selected features Option to use only the selected features in both layers The types of output layers will vary depending on the type of the input layers e Between a polygon layer and a linear one the output layer will be polygonal e Between a linear layer and a polygonal one the output layer will be linear e Between a polygon layer and
18. Update Delete Truncate Reference Trigger JAI 7 Permissions It allows to assign permissions to the table Once this is set click on the Next button O 2015 gvSIG Page 91 of 371 Ne O Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n Update table statistics Algunos gestores de base de datos tienen la opcion de recopilar estadisticas de los datos de las tablas para optimizar el acceso a los datos tras una insercion masiva de estos Puede indicar aqui si desea que se realice esta operacion al final de la exportacion Recreate table statistics when finish 8 Update table statistics It allows to recalculate the table statistics at the end of the export Once this Is set click on the Next button Postcreation statements Puede indicar una sentencia SQL a ejecutar tras la creacion de la tabla en la base de datos Esto puede ser de utilidad para asignar una configuracion de permisos peculiar para crear algun tipo de indice que no cree la aplicacion por defecto o a adir alguna columna a la tabla que no este en la tabla original Statement to execute before the creation of the table 9 SQL post creation It allows to designate an SQL statement to be executed after completion of the export Once this is set click on the Next button Export options Select the records to export 2 All records O Only selected records CO Filtered records GML Expression name optional GM
19. lasociaci n e File The Select button allows to indicate where and in what format want to save the image When its selected the output file button Properties is enabled This button allows access to a new properties window whose options depends on the type of selected image format O Properties photometric RGB S o interleave BAND e compression ONE e tfw Apply Accept Cancel Depending on the size of the output image this process can be very long so it is recommendable control the size in pixels of the output image When the process finishes a table with statistics where listed the path of the image that has been saved will appear the disk size of the output image the duration of the process and if the image has indicated the compression or not 38 2 Save as It allows the change of a raster format Available from the Layer Export to menu in the export raster bar button raster and the geoprocessing toolbox The interface is as follows fs O Select file Sawe In Ca alvaro e ga oe 1 pa 00 Benimaclet Escritorio M sica photometric RGB 7 oo Edu Events Opticks oe BAND DO resultados geodata Plantillas ME ERVE caine Biblioteca de calibre gvSIG P blico compression NONE CartoTaller qvSIG desktop Simbologia tw C Descargas Im genes Taller Documentos MEGAsyne Testdata dwhelper MEGAsyne Downloads Videos Files of Type files TEA Save Cancel e On t
20. properties Menu Document Table Button Project Manager Table Stop editing ES Add row a Export to El Remove row Add column Rename column Remove column Column manager Sort ascending al Me a E Sort descending Find and select duplicates iS 14 Field calculator Create join Create link M E 2 ea ca Statistics Properties New Open Rename Delete Properties AAN Table s properties configuration window options are O 2015 gvSIG Page 313 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 9 gvsic asociaci n 33 Table properties Ns e a E I Creation date l owner Locale English l comments Column information I la Precision Pattern Valueld Long O 0 l Polyid Polyid Long 0 0 I AREA Double 3 240 PERIME PERIME Double 3H 0 I MIAEPOIN AEPOIN Lang 2 HHHO QIN AEPOIN Lang rO D W AEPTTY AEPTTY Long O 0 LW MAEPTN AEPTN String O pe AEPTVAL AEPTVAL Long O 2 0 WMJAEPTD AEPTD String li AEPTICAO AEPTIC string pe AEPTOK AEPTD string Cancel Apply OK 1 Table s identification fields Allow change name creation date owner language and comments 2 Columns properties aa Checkbox that allow choose show hide one field of the table By default all fields are visible except field Geometry Field Geomet
21. Click on Next 59 4 Find and select duplicates To find and select duplicate values in one field of the Table This tool is available from the Table menu and its relevant button bar For using this tool the field of the table must be selected The tool will select automatically all the records with a value not unique the value will be repeated in more than one record of the Table It will show a window with the number of different values with duplicates and the total number of duplicates 59 5 Statistics To get statistic values of one numeric field of the Table This tool is available from the Table menu and its relevant button bar For using this tool the field of the table must be selected It is possible to calculate statistics of all the records of one table if there is not any selected or of which are selected The interface Is 2015 gvSIG Page 324 of 371 ND 0 Te gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide le asociacion Statistics sum 208240 0 Recount 100 Media 2082 4 Maximum 5445 0 Minimum 1 0 scope 5444 0 Varianza 2105946 14 Standard deviation 1451 1878376006327 port close Statistics Show the values of the sum recount media maximum minimum scope varianza and standard deviation e Export To export these values as a table in csv or dbf format If it is csv a new panel will appear where the user will choose the separator type se
22. Countries Antarctica 7 Europe amp Central Asia gt Latin America amp Caribbean Specific tools are available from the menu Vista portable Men Export to view Open source view Generate package Regenerate Portable View fram view The navigation tools available are Icon Tool Hotkey Description Pan Change the view framing dragging the display area in all directions with the mouse You should keep the primary mouse button usually the left button pressed and move it to the desired direction Fixed zoom in Allows you to zoom in on the center of your data frame Fixed zoom out Allows you to zoom out on the center of your data frame 2015 gvSIG Page 365 of 371 0 eee 4 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp asociaci n Zoom in Allows you to zoom in to a geographic window by clicking a point or dragging a box Zoom out Allow you to zoom out from a geographic window by clicking a point or dragging a box Back Allows you to go back to the previous extent Full extent Allows you to zoom to the full extent of your map You can zoom in or zoom out using the mouse scroll wheel In this case the expand is made using as a focus point the center of the view With the mouse scroll wheel pressed and moving it the command is executed The available query tools are Icon Herramienta Tecla rapida Descripcion Identify Identify the geographic feature on
23. Creation date Oct16 2015 S A 7 ES EA EA a cr 1 Menu bar 2 Buttons bar 3 Project manager It allows to manage all the documents which make a project 4 Work area In this space we will be able to have the different project documents opened and work with them 5 Status bar The status bar provides information about coordinates distances etc to the user 4 2 Types of documents In gvSIG there are the following documents e Views It allows to work with geographical data The geographical information is represented as a Set of layers 2015 gvSIG Page 27 of 371 0 EE eee gvSIG 2 2 User guide Es gvSIG P asociaci n e Tables It allows to work with alphanumeric data e Maps It allows to design maps with the different cartographic elements which make a map View legend escale to print it or export it as a PDF ca Note Some of the complements add new documents to gvSIG An example is the new complement of Portable view 4 3 Vocabulary used in gvSIG It is advisable that the gvSIG user gets familiar with the following terms Project GvSIG projects allows to save your work sessions in a file with a gvsproj gvsproj extension A gvSIG project has the origins of the information file paths geodatabases web links and the work done on this data legends labeled designed maps graphics Layer The information with a geographical component is shown as layers Each layer represents
24. ECW Enhanced ecw Yes No Compression Wavelet MrSID Sid Yes No Multiresolution seamless image database IMG img Yes Yes GDAL raster file GIF Graphics gif Yes No GDAL raster file Interchange Format 2015 gvSIG Page 95 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n TIFF Tagged tiff Yes Yes GDAL raster file Image File Format tif JPEG Joint JG Yes Yes GDAL raster file Photographic Experts Group jpeg JPEG2000 Jp2 Yes Yes GDAL raster file j2k PNG Portable png Yes Yes GDAL raster file Network Graphics ASCII ASC Yes No GDAL raster file RAW Yes No GDAL raster file Netpbm format ppm Yes Yes GDAL raster file PPM Portable pixmap format Netpbm format pgm Yes No GDAL raster file PGM Portable Graphic format Windows Bitmap bmp Yes Yes GDAL raster file BMP DAT ENVI dat Yes No GDAL raster file LAN ERDAS lan Yes No GDAL raster file GIS ERDAS g S Yes No GDAL raster file PIX PCI Pix Yes No GDAL raster file Geomatics AUX PCI aux Yes No GDAL raster file Geomatics ADF ESRI Grids adf Yes No GDAL raster file BSB Nautical kap Yes No GDAL raster file Chart KAP 2015 gvSIG Page 96 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n Idrisi Raster ERS rst Yes No GDAL raster file TXT txt Yes No GDAL raster file RMF raster SW Yes No GDAL raster file matrix format mtw Ilwis Raster Map mpl Yes Yes GDAL raster file MPL 13 2 Remote services Informative table
25. Is visible Size by default 3 Chart format To define the format of the different elemnents of the Chart e Plot To define the background outline and the size Chart type Data origin Chart format L Plot Value labels Value labels Axis w Show values in chart T i is Label font Font Auto default size a 3 W Axijs Information shown Category values Label rotation Horizontal e Value labels To define the labels of the Chart Chart type Data origin Chart format i 3 Plot 3 Value labels gt ii AXIS e Y Axis 7 Y Axis Title Is visible Labels e Visible Label rotation Horizontal Axis To define the X and Y axis Once all has been set up click on Accept and the plot will be shown in the Chart document 2015 gvSIG Page 347 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide E 22 A 1 200 000 1 700 0010 1 600 000 1 500 000 1 400 000 1 300 000 1 200 000 1 160 000 1 000 000 300 000 200 000 700 000 600 000 500 000 400 000 300 000 200 000 100 000 o ALMER A C DIZ C RDOBA GRANADA HUELVA JA N M LAGA SEVILLA m Population Fopulation Clicking on Create plot again we can make a new plot and combine it with the existent one Chart es ot A 1 900 000 1 800 000 14 000 1 700 000 13 000 1 600 000 re 1 500 000 1 400 000 11 0
26. Mask by region of interest Geographic transformations 2015 gvSIG Page 208 of 371 NN A 2 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide ra ai asociaci n Eg Reproject layer Geolocalization En set projection amp Georeferencing Export to raster LJ Save view to georeferenced raster E Save as EL Clipping Change data type a Export view to image Tool Box Contextual menu of layer 6 Toolbox 355 Tools eee eee eee eisai g e E Raster prope ries Algorithms Qu gvSIG Geoprocesses ES Histogram Multispectral raster ct Color table o Principal Components 0 Tasseled Cap E Area of interest Raster layers Be 1 change data type ES Generate overviews io g Mask Vector layers tools ES Rename a g gvSIG Tools E Multispectral raster 2 Attributes table A 6 Principal Components ai Us Tasseled Cap Zoom to layer Tools for raster layers a Ji change data type on g clip 9 Export Delete layer E g Filters SN sis I Mask by region of interest NS be Radiometric enhancedment Show errors Reproject Y Set projection H ag Models Tools SE Scripts Save as Soom to raster resolution Bring to front Tools Copy cut Exp aort t Add layer Menu 2015 gvSIG Page 209 of 371 eee O gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n C ES 2 Derived geometries Raster layer Multispectral raster Enhanced Geo
27. Symbols folder home falvaro gvSIG plugins org gvsig app mainplugin Default font emo Tile Cache Sets the cached properties that use gvSIG Tilecache WARNING You mustn t to change this section if you re not sure what you are doing Maximum size of tilecache 5 000 Resolution levels 25 Tile size 256 WMS WCS Tile size 1 024 Path structure FLATX Remove cache Path to the files of cache home falvaro gvSIG gwsig_rcache Printed map units It sets the default measurement units Default measure unit Default measure unit reference system Inthe world View Sets the options for working with View documents Set the projection system will default to the view zoom factors and background color selection and units O 2015 gvSIG Page 40 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide gvSIG C asociaci n Default projection EPSG 4326 Change Add new layers in invisible mode d Keep scale on resizing Zoom in factor Default wiew back color F Default selection color E Map units Behavior It sets the screen refresh Screen refresh rate None fastest drawing Half Full real time response Note the screen refresh rate allows to improve the map navigation experience by visually reducing the latency time between map drawings This is especially interesting while editing However the refresh is a task that slightly increases CPU proc
28. TT gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n C With the options in Layers is possible to create a symbol composed by different layers with the button Add layer green The layers can be deleted or ordered with the buttons Delete layer and Order layer s O Symbol property editor Preview Properties Type Simple marker symbol Units Simple marker i Color pm Led Kofi E vst A Use outline Border color z assi e 30 18 4 0x cancel 20 3 Editor Simple marker symbol Selecting the Simple marker symbol the interface is 2015 gvSIG Page 141 of 371 a OC Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n s O Symbol property editor Preview Properties Type Picture marker symbol Units Pixels in the world Picture marker Picture file home alvaro qvSIG plugins org qvsig app ma Browse Selection picture file home alvaro qvSIG plugins org gvsig app ma Browse Layers e ae a 0 oK cancel It is possible to select the image for representing one symbol This image can be jpg png bmp svg To add it select the path to the image clicking on Browse and Picture file Also it is possible to put as a reference any image URI if the format is supported by gvS
29. The interface is the following one Q RGB Fllters ey r O O Y A A A i I RGB Filters i l a enhance fm l Active v 1 Bright I Brightness D Contrast AL RY 0 O Equalization H Border detection CH Spatial functions Ca Colors adjust l l Ga Masks i l s i y Apply on preview I 1 O Only on visualization J 2 New Layer l i J Create file COS SSI mel fe i Name of the layer dedo AM e i I l Name of the layer NewLayer_2 Apply Close Cancel 1 RGB Filters List of the available filters classyfied by type When selecting a filter its configuration panel is shown in number 2 Double clicking one of the filters or clicking on the Add filter button available in 4 while a filter is selected we add this filter to the list of filters to apply 2 Filter configuration Configurable options of the selected filter in 1 All the filters have a check box to enable or disable the filter when it is in the list of added It is usually at the top of the control panel of each filter with the text Active 3 Preview It allows users to visualize in real time the result of the changes that are being applied The options in the lower part allow to select the result only on visualization or in a new layer 4 List of filters underway If a filter is in this list means that it is being executed in the preview The filters will be executed in the
30. To draw circumferences indicating three points which define the circle The circumference is a polygonal feature This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 First point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting First point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 2 Second point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Second point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 3 Third point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Third point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 28 10 Insert ellipse To draw ellipses The ellipse is a linear feature 2015 gvSIG Page 194 of 371 Es gvSIG P gvSIG 2 2 User guide er asociacion This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 First point of A axis You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting First point of A axis that opens a window for entering the coordinat
31. 2 All features O Filtered features SQL GDBMS l Select ext No Style OK Cancel 1 Options to set up the format and the font of the labelling e Font To select the font e Color To select the colour and transparecny e Fixed text size To define the label size e Fit on text area To give the text size depending on the area of the feature labelled e Use halo To use a colour halo around the labels Its useful to improve the visualization of the labels e Halo width To define the halo width 2 To define the labelling expression Clicking on a new window will open to set up the labelling expression O 2015 gvSIG Page 125 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dos asociaci n O Expression Fields scalerank featurecla LABELRANE SOVEREIGNT SOW_A3 ADM _ DIF LEWEL TYPE ADMIN ADMO A3 GEOU DIF GEOUNIT GU A3 SU DIF Expression NAME 3 To create SQL sequencies to apply filters to the features for the different labelling types 4 To select a background style image for the labelling Symbol selector window will open In gvS G Basic library there are some to be used or the user can create its labels 2015 gvSIG Page 126 of 371 LLL a gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide a asociacion C s O Symbol selector Label styles Sa Style library e gvSIG Basic Pr
32. EPSG from the dropdown box and it will display the following options to find a coordinate system Type EPSG Search criteria 2 By code D By name By area earn Code Name Type Area 1 Indicate the Search criteria code name or area 2 Write the text string you want to search either a code name or geographical area 3 Click the Search button The list of coordinate system containing the text string will be displayed 4 From the list select the CRS that you want to apply to the View and click OK The InfoCRS button that is in the New CRS dialog box allows access to the report of the coordinate system properties CRS INFORMATION Selected CRS code 4326 Repository EPSG CRS name WGS84 Projected No Datum name WorldGeodeticSystem1 954 Ellipsoid WGS84 Semi major axis 6378137 0 Inverse flattening 298 257223563 Prime Meridian Greenwich Meridian length 0 0 proj4 String proj longlat ellps W G584 9 2 Define a User s CRS It allows the definition of user s CRS When you select User CRS type in the New CRS window the following options are displayed 2015 gvSIG Page 47 of 371 ND Te gvSIG asociacion gvSIG 2 2 User guide Type User CRS Search criteria 2 By code O By name gear Anguila 1957 British Wes yes D Anguila 1957 e Choose a previously created CRS you just need to se
33. Field definitions It allows us to define the type of layer e Point Point e Curve Line e Surface Polygon e Multipoint Multipoint 4 With the Add field button we can add attribute fields to the new layer Once the geometry type and possible additional fields are set click on the Next button Adding layer Add layer to view 2015 gvSIG Page 84 of 371 Ge gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 5 At last we can add the new layer to the View Click on Finish button to finish 12 2 Layer export It allows to export a vector layer All the elements of a layer or only a selection of them can be exported Supported formats for export are kml dxf shp and PostGIS It is available from Layer Export to A new window allowing us to select the export format opens Select the format to export KML format DXF format DataBase throws JDBC format Shape format Once the format is selected click on the Next button We are then guided through the export process Export options depend on the selected format 12 2 1 Export layer to a shp format It allows us export a vector layer to a shapefile The interface will guide us through the export process Select file Doo 1 1 First of all we must select the name and file location of the new layer Once those fields are set click on the Next button 2015 gvSIG Page 85 of 371 gvSIG asociacion gvSIG 2 2
34. Grid NTv2 Transformation based on an NTv2 grid file For this you must choose the NTv2 file from a list of available files or import it from a location to be specified Since in the NTv2 file the translations have been calculated in a given base CRS you must indicate here whether the NTv2 was calculated in the base CRS of the View or the base CRS of the layer The grid file has a specific scope which can be deduced from the file information that is displayed in the processing panel Transformation is not applied beyond this scope so the re projection accuracy will be considerably lower since only the corresponding coordinate system conversion would be applied 2015 gvSIG Page 56 of 371 ND lt lt lt gt gt ll rrr 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n Grid NTv2 Import grid Ll Select grid Select Grids File calculated for Layer CRS EPSG 23030 O CRS of the layer EP5G 4326 3 Grids on null Recent With this application you can select a transformation that has been Transformations used previously If a recent transformation is selected two actions can be taken to accept the transformation or to click on the Next button to review the selected transformation In the next panels you access to the information of the chosen transformation where you can modify it or select a different one Transformations Transform Source CRS Target CRS Details
35. Grouping field To select the field from a dropdown menu 3 Temporal axis One particularity of this geoprocess is that it is possible to assign a time field if the input layer had it In this case the last or firs entry date can be included as a field table This is very useful when the context table would be tables with sensor data with many observations and all of them corresponding to an unique sensor In this case is possible to group by the sensor type and assign to the table entry the last observation of the sensor Also we could select the option of assigning the first geometry having one point representing the sensor with its data being the last made observation 4 Field Function It is possible to include to the attribute table other fields If they are numeric a function can be applied and if they are text assign them to the first ones 5 Geometry The output geometry can be 2015 gvSIG Page 262 of 371 HN l a gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide ai asociaci n e e Set the first geometry Only one of them the first found e Creates a multigeometry with all geometries of a group e Spatial fusion of the geometries polygons only 41 2 Buffer This geoprocess creates buffers around the geometries of vector features points lines and polygons of one input layer creating a new polygon vector layer The interface is Input hidro andalucia Options Area defined by a distance in met
36. ROIs on a raster layer This regions can be used to extract statistics in classifications processes to mask etc It is available from the Layer manu from the layer contextual menu in the TOC and from the raster toolbar The interface is the following one Poligons Points ROl l44 41 35690407 ROI 144 4156998 9 JADE ANA O 2015 gvSIG Page 221 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide Es gvSIG lasociaci n e ROls table This table shows the defined regions of interest for the layer For every ROI the table shows a name the number of geometries displayed by types and the colour associated with the ROI The name and the colour can be changed by the user e New It creates a new ROI e When the ROI has been created we can add the geometries We can add polygons points or lines depending on the selected tool on the raster in the View Each click adds a vertex to the geometry of the ROI to finish drawing a line or polygon just double click To add geometries to a ROI select the corresponding entry in the table and draw the new geometries on the view as we just described e Delete It removes the selected ROI in the table e Apply or Accept The defined list of ROIS gets associated with the raster layer e Save ROls to shp file It allows users to save the ROIs as a shape file e Load ROIs from shp File It allows to use a shape file as ROIs 34 6 Generate overviews It allows to create pyrimids The pyrimi
37. The cursor window when the view is active can be resized and moved The contents of the window will display in the magnifying glass windows By bringing the mouse pointer to the edges of the center window displays a horizontal or vertical arrows clicking and dragging on those arrows the center window is resized To move the center window should bring the mouse pointer to the corners of the window until the pointer changes to a crossed arrows clicking and dragging on those arrows the scroll is performed 1 Navigation tools Icono Herramienta Descripci n gt Increase the zoom It allows approaching to the center of the data level frame of the View Multiplied by 2 the zoom level Decrease the zoom It zooms out from the center of the data frame of level the View Divide by 2 the zoom level ay Zoom to selected It allows zoom in on a particular area of the the area View 5 Zoom all this makes a frame of total area occupied by all the layers of the the View Last Zoom It allows return to previous frame amy Move Image Allows to change the frame of the view by dragging the visualization field in all directions with the 2015 gvSIG Page 243 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide Es gvSIG lasociaci n mouse Should keep the mouse button down and move the mouse to the desired direction The middle mouse button can increase and decrease the zoom of the View 2 magnifier window Expanding the view associated with the central window
38. The selected fields in 1 will be added in 7 The selected fields in 7 can be removed and will appear again in 1 4 Background symbol If show is not active the background will be transparent 5 Show chart axis 6 Size It opens a new window to set up the chart size These are the options o Fixed height All charts wwill have the same size o Sum of field values sThe size of the bars will be indicated by the sum of all the records for the fields making up the chart and it will be represented in a proportional way o Field size depending on one field The chart will be proportional to a specific field o Draw symbols within specific boundaries Only the symbols within this range will be drawn avoiding the rest O Set symbol size Fixed height 25 Lale O Tama o variable de la suma de los valores representados Field size Field PC normalize by Units Boundaries Pixels AP ACLI From OR To 000 HA In the world OK Cancel 17 11 Multiple attributes Quantity by category To represent one field of the layer with a colour intervals and other field with graduated symbols Both fields must be numerical The interface contains 2015 gvSIG Page 117 of 371 NN A gvSIG asociaci n C rFields with values Variation by Color field POB y Color ramp gvSIG 2 2 User guide
39. Trunk O Create file 2 Open in memory Name of the layer NewLayer_5 Accept Cancel Apply e Layer Name of the input layer e Datatype Options to change the data type e Allows to select between create a file or open in memory 38 5 Export View to image Export the frame of the view to an image Allows to select from four output formats bmp png jpg and tif Available from the View Export from the menu and from export raster button bar 2015 gvSIG Page 253 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n C 39 GEOPROCESSING 39 1 Introduction Geoprocessing is the execution of analytical and modelling operations of geographic data for creating new information To access to the geoprocessing tools go to Tools Geoprocessing menu or with the shortkey in the Toolbox I Addons manager Symbology scripting Attribute editor Development Transforms s Toolbox E Modeler History B command line 2 Results Data explorer W Geoprocessing help 5 Catch coordinates There are the following geoprocessing options e Toolbox To execute a geoprocess or launch a model OG Toolbox 355 Tools 2222 eee ee ee El gorithms H E gvSIG Geoprocesses H E gvSIG Tools H a Models H Scripts S82 SEXTANTE e Modeller To create a model with the application of several geoprocesses e History All geoprocessing actions are recorded Th
40. WMG iesisisiariisminian ri 301 VIEW 3D 2015 gvSIG Page 11 of 371 asociaci n 2 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide gt 93 30D PLUGIN curador dai 302 Doak INTRO CUCA Oricon leed 302 STARS DA APN OO e Eo 303 5S4 SD TOO Siri 304 54 PNEC SD VS Wii aro iaa 304 A E OVEN e On A 305 54 3 Synchronize Vi Wo oococcccccoconononconononocconononnnconnrnrrnnonnnnrn narra rra rrnrrarnsnrrnnnes 306 54 4 Synchronize vieWpoTft ssesssssssessressesrensnnsrnonsnsnnssrnannnnnnnanrnnsrnnsnnnnnanne 306 54 5 Full screen MOE cccececececeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeaeaeseeaeetseseeneataeeneatataeeneaneaneaneags 306 99 3D PROPERTIES css A 307 55 1 General 3D preferenCeS sssssrrsrrrrrrerrrsrrrerrrerrrsrrrerrrrrsrrrrrrsserrrrresene 307 AI DODE ee RU II ER 307 55 3 3D Layer propertieS sssssrrerrrsrrrerrrerrrerrrsrrrsrrrrssrrrrrrssrrrrrrsserrrrresere 308 TABLES 56 DOCUMENT TAB LE sims 313 Ol Tables proper anida 313 9 7 TABLES INTERFACE iaa 315 A E e Eo E ETE 315 56 ADD A TABLE sra ini 316 50L MEO PP e OP UU 316 SIN ola AA O o o E E ert 316 3072 Ada data Da SC isidro resina 317 99 TABLE TOO Sissi tele 319 59 1 INTO dUCHION iman ia rinitis tribanda 319 AA o y PO UP o e A A EE AE E 321 oe aE E huenieat 323 59 4 Find and select dUpliCates occcoccccononononcononaccnrononananronaranrononanannannnes 324 oo SUS CS APPO y e E E E pence ceanens 324 60 SELECTION TOOLS cinc 326 60 1 INTOCUCHO Miranda iaa 326 60 2 Sele CLION DY a
41. accflow Flow accumulation ACV Corr Anisotropic coefficient of variation addeventtheme Points layer from table aggregate Aggregate aggregationindex Aggregation index ahp Analytical Hierarchy Process AHP aSPeCCt Aspect buffer Buffer On the left side of the list you will find the command line name of each algorithm This is the one you have to use to make a reference to the algorithm you want to use On the right you find the name of the algorithm in the current language which is the same name that identifies the algorithm in the toolbox However this name is not constant since it depends on the current language and thus cannot be used to call the algorithm Instead a command line is needed Now let s see how to get a list of the parameters that an algorithms require and the outputs that it will generate TO do it you can use the describealg name_of_the_algorithm method Use the command line name of the algorithm not the full descriptive name For example if we want to calculate a flow accumulation layer from a DEM we will need to execute the corresponding module which according to the list show using the ags method is identified as accflow The following is a description of its inputs and outputs gt describe
42. cocococcccocococconononaccncononanronononannorononnnnannananes 194 28 9 Insert circumference three poOlNtsS cococcccccocononccconcnnnconenonancnnonannnnon 194 ZO AO HASSE SNS tai 194 28 11 Insert filled CIN MA e e UE vil 195 28 12 Insert POLYGON ccccecececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeaeseeteaegesaesaesatanenneags 195 ZS Ade MASSE DOI O eaa E E EE E 196 28 14 Insert filled regular polygon ssesssessrssrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrerrrrrrssrrrrrrrserrrrne 196 28 15 Insert regular DOlY O ON arras abril 196 28 16 Insert filled rectangle enescu imun nan E aia eriei 197 28 17 Insert rECtANGIC cccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeaesseaeetseseeatataneneateneateags 197 28 18 Insert filled SPINE CUVO iiarisnatisiocio idad 197 28 19 Insert spline CUFVe sesssssnrsrrrsrrrerrerrrrrrrerrrerrrrrrserrrrrnesrrrrrrsserrrrrreene 198 28 20 Insert rectangular MatriX ssessssssresrresrrsrrrrerrerrrerrrrrrsrrrrrrrrerrrrrrrene 198 28 21 Insert polar MAatriX sesssessresrrsrrrsrrrerrrerrrsrresrrresrrrrrrssrrrrrrrserrrrrrsere 199 29 DRAWING SUPPORTING TOOLS sssanssssssnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 200 ZO A OU ON CUE IIA 200 PAS 2 Gi Lo EEEE E E A E E EEE E E E E E T 201 2015 gvSIG Page 8 of 371 asociaci n SIG 2 2 U id Es gvSIG gv 2 User guide y 30 EDITING TOOL Siria 202 301 Ls MTOA OM dera ia 202 30 2 UNdO Redo NISTONY coccocccccccconononcononocncconononancononnnnnronononarnonnnnnrnrennnnnnnes 2
43. contiene componentes adicionales en su lado derecho Si dejamos la opci n por defecto No autorellenar el archivo seleccionado pasa a la celda en cuesti n no a adi ndose nada m s en otras celdas Con cualquiera de las otras opciones se toma el nombre de dicho archivo como nombre base y se rellenan todas las celdas situadas por debajo con nuevos nombres de archivo creados a partir dicho nombre base y valores num ricos correlativos o los valores de otro par metro seleccionado Pueden seleccionarse celdas pinchando y arrastrando sobre la tabla Esta selecci n puede copilarse y pegarse en otras partes utilizando las funciones que aparecen al hacer clic con el bot n derecho del rat n sobre la tabla De esta forma resulta m s sencillo completar la tabla cuando aparezcan valores repetidos 2015 gvSIG Page 297 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide ig asociacion Al igual que en la ejecuci n de un geoproceso ndividualmente es necesario establecer las dimensiones y el tama o de celda cuando la extensi n en concreto genere capas raster En el caso de un proceso por lotes este proceso se lleva a cabo de igual modo estableciendo una configuraci n nica que se aplica a todos los subprocesos sta se establece mediante una pesta a independiente aunque a diferencia de la ejecuci n normal de una extensi n no existen las opciones de ajuste a la Vista y ajuste a una capa Por lo dem s el manejo es igual La selecci n elegi
44. csv files Import a csv table Options Allows access to the georeferencing options window End Test The test processing is completed Eliminates the test image loaded in the reference view a Test georeferencing Run a test with the control points introduced Apply the transformation and loading the transformed image on the reference view Es Extit to georeferencing Georeferencing finishes Asked if we want to load on view the result of the last processed RMS RMS RMS Global The interface window Options is as follows 2015 gvSIG Page 246 of 371 Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 0 georeferencing Georeferencing algorithm Afin transformation O Polinomial transformation Output file home alvaro NewLayer_4 tit Select Options Background color MN Text and markings Show control point number graphically Add errors to CSV file Center view to selected point Error threshold to show warning 200 Accept Cancel I Apply e Georeferencing algorithm Select the georeferencing algorithm to will be applied e Output files Select the georeferencing algorithm to will be applied e Options Allows to select the background color text and trademarks as well as enable disable to display the number of the checkpoint adding errors to the csv file and focus the views on the selected point It also to
45. i Ee gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide ra ai asociaci n 4 A new window will be showed Identify results g ES 2 ne_10m_populated pla 4 172 ADMO_A3 ADMOCAP Y 7 20 8 Populat ADMONAME ADM NAME ADMIN COD CAPALT CAPIN CHANGED CHECKME CITYALT COMPARE DIFFASCI DIFFNOTE ELEVATION 10 0 On the left side the elements from which the information has been asked and its layer will be visible On the rigth side the attribute values of the seleced element on the left part 24 3 Query area To measure areas and perimeters over the area of the View frame This tool is available in its specific toolbar The steps to follow are 1 Click on Query area 2 Click on the point which represents the first vertex of the area to be measured and drag the mouse and make click on each new vertex ending with a double click 3 On the right bottom part of the View window the area A and perimeter P can be found P 467 710 4m A 9 776 286 245 47 m O 2015 gvSIG Page 17 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n 24 4 Query distance To measure distances over the area of the View frame This tool is available in its specific toolbar The steps to follow are 1 Click on Query distance 2 Click on the point which represents the first vertex of line to be measured and drag the mouse and make click on each new vertex ending with a doub
46. 0b4 by Pat Niemeyer pat pat net bsh The command line interface is based on BeanShell BeanShell is a Java source interpreter with object scripting language features that meaning that it dynamically executes Standard Java syntax and extends it with common scripting conveniences such as loose types commands and method closures like those in Perl and JavaScript Several new commands have been added to it so you can run geoalgorithms or get information about the geospatial data you are using among other things 48 2 Getting information about data Algorithms need data to run Layers and tables are identified using the name they have in the table of contents of gvSIG The data command prints a list of all data objects available to be used along with the particular name of each one i e the one you have to use to refer to it Calling it you will get something like this RASTER LAYERS mdt25 asc VECTOR LAYERS Contour lines TABLES To get more information about a particular data object use the describe name_of_data_object command Here are a few examples of the result you will get when using it to get more information about a vector layer a raster layer and a table 2015 gvSIG Page 290 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp lasociaci n gt describe points shp Type Vector layer Point Number of entities 300 Table fields ID X Y SAND SILT CLAY SOILTYPE EXTRAPOLAT gt describe dem2
47. 1 Click on Next 3 Layers It allows you to access to the set of available layers in the WFS server and to choose the one you want to add to the View 2015 gvSIG Page 69 of 371 mue DT gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide de ES asociaci n Information Layers Fields Options Area aia bl name A O O e E O O O O O O O O O ee ee Layer name Geometry type Canadian provinces and territories coastlines countries glacier outlines glaciers Greenland feature Selection_Info Geometry Greenland surface elevation conta Greenland ice core locations International Date Line North Pole Geographic North Pole Geomagnetic North Pole of Inaccessibility North Pole Magnetic North Pole of Cold North Poles permafrost ground Ice conditions Show layer names WES version Indira ab Features cache _ none Previous r 1 Double click on the layer you want to add to the View 2 Name with which the layer will be displayed in the TOC 3 Information about the WFS version 4 Click on Next 4 Fields Information Layers Fields Options Area Select the layer fields greenland climate network Object msGeometry Geometry we Id String ae NAME String
48. 1 It allows you to select the image format 2 It allows you to select the CRS of the layer It should be similar to the one from the View 3 It allows you to select the text format for information queries 4 Click on OK and the layer will be added to the View 11 5 Adding a WFS The steps to add a WMTS through the Add layer window are 1 Connecting to the service 2015 gvSIG Page 67 of 371 O Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide de ES asociaci n se _OSM PostGIS Raster File WMS WES Server Con nect Dm mm E Name atlas of the Cryosphere Northern Hemisphere Cryosphere is a map server that provides data and informatio pertinent to the frozen regions of Earth including monthly climatologles of sea ice extent and concentration snow cover extent and snow water equivalent in addition to glacler outlines permafrost extent and classification ice sheet elevation and accumulation and more In orderto support polar projections the Atlas ls divided Into two separate map servers one for the Northern Hemisphere and one for the Southern Hemisphere In addition to providing map images and source data through Open Geospatial Consortium Inc OGC protocols WMS WFS and WES a dynamic web interface for exploring these data Is also available at http nsid
49. 1 394 2 a al 0 259 1 384 1 4652 255 30 74 251 1 462 1 529 7 Baja 0 153 455 1 529 1 563 5 Sa 0 204 255 1 563 1 597 4 SaS 0 204 255 1 597 1 631 2 Ma 147 163 10 1 631 1 6653 1 SaS 110 138 11 1 663 1 232 8 MaS 390 199 14 1 732 1 800 gt aa 32 173 83 1 800 1 868 2 233 Register M 4 25 bl mlde 251x ooo TIET 1 20 l Minimum Maximum 2 410 Recalc statistics E BDI AE AA ee ee eee i l l T a a 4 cd l W Activate color table Interpolated Limits adjust o alli E E XJ 1 Middle distance Save as default Apply Accept Cancel 2015 gvSIG Page 217 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 1 Activate color table When this tool is launched for an image without any associated color table all the components are shown as not active To start working we should tick the check box 2 Library List of color tables that are included in gvSIG You can choose a colour table to apply to the image Right clicking on this area a contextual menu appears which can change the way to visualize the libraries List Smalllcon Largelcon List Small Icon Large Icon MW Fi Forest Soil 100 E Wi Soil Forest 100 JJ 1 leve M2 Blues 35 NM A2 cool 100 MO Greens 35 MO Marine 24 Below the colour table library there are buttons to add export i
50. 28 29 3 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 af _ _ _ _ A L1 110 LA L3 L4 LS L L7 La Lg Pl P10 P2 PE Pg Pi 21 15 OCHA Humanitarian It is the set of symbols created by the Office for the Coordination of Humanitarian Affairs OCHA with humanitarian goals aiming help workers and volunteers show and interpret information about emergencies and crisis quickly and easily This is the standard or the emergencies symbology O SN Sh Affected Affected Airport affected Airport affected Airport destroyed Airport destroyed2 A A ra A rI rJ Airport not affected Airport not affected2 Bridge affected Bridge affected2 Bridge destroyed Bridge destroyed2 2015 gvSIG Page 155 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n O o A 4 fae IN z sy if y Extremel Extreme2 Extremes Light1 Light2 Light3 Moderatel Moderate ModerateS Severel x A t A t a x ra 4 hr i PA i A f Poy a F 4 Po e f f E Pl O F A F Pay e al i 4 f a a i A f a A O ra f y e i y Po e f y Pa severe Severe3 strongl strong2 strong3 Very stronglWery strong2Very stronga Wiolentl Violent a A Extreme Light Moderate No data Severe Strong Wery strong Violent Waterbody gvSIG 2 2 User guide 21 16 OSM This symbol library is based on the symbology made by SjJJB Management and called SJJB SVG Map Icons Some of these icons have their oringin in the US National
51. AL Lo REPO EC tuerce code EE A A 212 41 14 SDOLIGL Olesa E AA A ears 273 ALL ION aria aia abro EERE 274 42 GVSIG GEOPROCESSES RASTER LAYERSG cccscccseseseneneneus 2 6 42 1 Change data tyPe cccccccscececescecececeeeseeeeeeaeeeeateeeeeeegtseeeneeetanesneateaneas 2 6 ATA WSK AA e e OU A O A 276 43 GVSIG GEOPROCESSES MULTISPECTRAL RASTER 2 7 43 1 Principal COMPONEN ES ivinirurcicia ire aiii 217 43 2 Tasseled CaPD ococococccconononconononancononancononornnnn nena ran ronnnnrnnrrnrnnrennnnarrenenanens 217 44 GVSIG TOOLS RASTER LAYERS assnnnnnnnnnssnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 279 AA DEE DIOJECU O g A a E E E E E E E E 279 44 2 Change data type cccecscececesceseceeeseeveceeaneneansceeceegesueaeeaeeantaneaneaneas 279 By ZA E EE 279 A A UA 279 44 5 Mask by region Of INterest ococcccccocononcccononanconononanoononananrononnnncronnnnnnns 279 2015 gvSIG Page 10 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide E arica 44 6 Radiometric enhanceMent cccococcccoconononocnonananconononancononarnnronornannannanans 279 AA Ts CMO IA Poo o E E O 279 ALO ROD OC nay eins E TN 279 45 GVSIG HERRAMIENTAS RASTER MULTIESPECTRAL 280 45 1 Principal cCO MN PONSA Sienra eri raro diivan AAU EAEE 280 45 2 Tasseled CaPD occcocccccconoconconononancononanrononnrnrnnronnrnnronnarnnrrnrnnrennnnrnrrenenanens 280 AG SEA DANTE naar A 281 AG Ass oe e o 281 AT MODE Erica iio 283 A E o II 283 47 2 Definition of INPUE
52. If you are satisfied with the settings click Next to begin copying files Install Directory a home alvaror2sw5Ib desktoprev5lIb de sktop 2 2 0 Setup Type Tupical ha El UO 2 eWSI desktop 2 2 0 eo 00000000 QQQ0Q0 0 lt Back Next gt Cancel 2015 gvSIG Page 19 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide Es gvSIG lasociaci n Click on Next and a progress bar window shows us that gvSIG is being installed The basic gvSIG is being installed In the following steps we can personalize the gvSIG set up installing plug ins or add ons Step Personalize the set up A first dialog window inform us that we can install plugins and add ons in gvSIG e Standard installation own binary installation Our downloaded set up file has a lot of plug ins some of wich are not installed by default but they are available to install No internet connection is needed during the installation procedure e Installation from file We can have a file with add ons ready to be intalled in gvsig e Installation from URL With an internet connection we can get all the plug ins and add ons availables on the gvSIG server and install all we need The only difference with the first option is that there may be add ons or plugin updates newer than our gvSIG version gvSIG desktop Setup Add ons installer Information How You have installed a basic evSIG version Next you will be able to install some additional ad
53. Number of intervals To indicate the number of the intervals for the legend 2 Symbol To define the symbol for the graduation The size is defined with a minimum value From to a maximum value Until You can also modify all the features of a specific symbol by clicking on the Template button or in its Background 3 Computentervals Once the above options have been defined this button will calculate the intervals defining the legend Add New ranks to the calculation can be added Remove all Remove to delete all remove all or some remove of the elements which make up the legend 4 To modify symbols labels and intervals automatically 17 8 Quantities Proportional symbols To represent quantities using symbol size to show exact values The interface contains m z Ll m z Ll Ll Ll Ll Lil mm o Ll ll Fields 3 POP_EST Normalization none Template Background l l oof es O A I To 10 00 l DS 1 Fields Value To choose the numeric field for which the classification will be made Normalization It s possible to choose a numeric field which will normalize the results being the quantities proportional 2 Symbol To define the symbol for the graduation The size is defined with a minimum value From to a maximum value Until You can also modify all the features of a specific symbopl by clicking on the Template b
54. Set and use the NoData values as transparent if it is checked Layer statistics sorted by band It may be the case that statistics are badly generated or not calculated in which case is possible to recalculate them clicking on Recalc statistics In each band we will see e Minimum Minimum value of the band e Maximum Maximum value of the band e RGB minimum RGB minimum value of the band e RGB maximum RGB maximum value of the band e Media Shows the average of all values of the band e Varianza Shows the varianza of the band 19 3 Bands To change the way in which each band of the image is displayed It allows to make compositions using the different bands of the raster lt is also possible add more bands from other files This is useful when working with Landsat type images where each band is from a different file The interface Is 2015 gvSIG Page 134 of 371 A Tree Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n bouldr tm Add Remove 01 8U bouldr_tm lan 2 8U bouldr_tm lan O 3 80 bouldr_tm lan O 4 80 bouldr_tm lan O O 5 80 bouldr_ tm lan O O 6 80 bouldr tm lan Bands 3 Save At the top there is a list with all the files of the layer Here you can add more files considering that must be a relation between them they have to be from the same geographic area This is useful for loading in the same layer various files frome the same sensor wher
55. URL Port Database database name User Password 4 Click on OK and the connection will be established When connected the window Add Layer GeoDB shows the tables layers available O 2015 gvSIG Page 78 of 371 pee AQ gvSIG 2 2 User guide Choose connection Test Choose table public spatial ref sys public tr_relieve andalucia public tr_relieve_andalucia2 public ts_comunicaciones_andall public ts ferrocarrilAndal public ts muni_andalucia public ts municipiosAndal gvSIG asociacion C G rTable fields gid nteger fnode Integer tnode_ Integer Ipoly_ Integer rpoly_ Integer length Double Table settings Name SOL restriction Geometry field the geom Current Projection Minimum X Maximum X Minimum Y Maximum Y 5002 03 1340 946 2116 898 2151 594 E1 Working area 2 Selection of information s ferracarrilAndal Dfield gid 7 EPSG 23030 r 1 Select the table to load When we select a table the Table Columns section will be updated showing all selected fields available in our table we can unselect those we don t want to load 2 Table settings In this section we can change the name of the layer displayed in the TOC which is filled by default with the name of the table It allows indicating a restriction by means of a SQL expression design and work area 3 Once all the parameters are set click o
56. User guide Export options Select the records to export 2 All records O Only selected records O Filtered records GML Expression name optional GML Expression 2 Export options It allows us to indicate if we want to export all the elemnts of the original layer those that are selected or those that meet certain selected criteria In the latter case we can enter filter expressions To finish the export we must click on the Export button 12 2 2 Export layer to a dxf format It allows us to export a vector layer to a dxf format The interface will guide us through the export process Select file o ES 1 First of all we must select the name and file location of the new layer Once those fields are set click on the Next button O 2015 gvSIG Page 86 of 371 E gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide ra ai asociaci n Export options Select the records to export 2 All records O Only selected records CO Filtered records GML Expression name optional GML o Expression lt Back Ner Export Cancel 2 Export options It allows us to indicate if we want to export all the elements of the original layer those that are selected or those that meet certain selected criteria In the latter case we can enter filter expressions Click on the Export button to finish the export 12 2 3 Export layer to a kml format It allows us to export a vectorial layer to a kml format The in
57. a given dataset Layers can represent the information through collections of points lines or polygons continuous surfaces such as Digital Terrain Model or raster images aerial photos or satellite images Table of It is the area where you can find a list of the layers which are available contents TOC for a viewing It allows to change the position of our layers the order of appearance of the layers in the View ties in with the display order to activate or deactivate the viewing and to show how each layer represents the information using a legend WMS Web Mapping Service is a OGC Open Geospatial Consortium standard service for visualization It represents geographical information in an image format such as PNG GIF o JPEG WMTS Web Map Tiled Service is a OGC standard service for visualization It uses tessellation to improve the response speed relative to WMS It represents the geographical information in an image format servicio de visualizaci n est ndar del OGC WFS Web Feature Service another OGC standard service to access to vector information WCS Web Coverage Service OGC standard service to access to raster data OSM Access to OpenStreetMap tile services CRS Coordinate Reference System Also known as Spatial Reference System Sistema de referencias coordenado o como se denomina m s habitualmente sistema de referencia 2015 gvSIG Page 28 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 5 PROJECTS 5 1 Project tools
58. a point one the output layer will be polygonal e Between a point layer and a polygonal one the output layer will be a point layer e Between a linear layer and a points one the output layer will be linear O 2015 gvSIG Page 268 of 371 LE eee gvSIG asociacion C e Between a point layer and a linear one the output layer will be a point layer gvSIG 2 2 User guide e Between two linear layers the output layer will be a linear layer 41 9 Dissolve To fuse the geometries which take an equal value for a specific field Also it allows to set that the condition of having the same value to be fusionated the geometries must be spatially adjacents or two geometries ermite fusionar aquellas geometr as que tomen id ntico valor para un campo especificado Tambi n pemite establecer que para que dos geometr as sean fusionadas adem s de tomar id ntico valor en el atributo especificado deban ser adyacentes espacialmente The interface Is Input layer ne 10m admin O countries Field SUBREGION Selected geometries Only dissolve adjacent Summary function Min Max Sum Avg Field ID O O O scalerank O O O LABELRANK J ADMO DIF eos ai 5S O LEVEL O O GEOU DIF Dissolve Vectorial Save to temporary file P 1 Input layer To select the layer to dissolve 2 Field To select the attribute to be used as the criteria for for fusionating the features of
59. and ETM will only for images with 6 or 7 bands 2015 gvSIG Page 278 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide a i asociaci n 44 GVSIG TOOLS RASTER LAYERS 44 1 Set projection See set projection in raster section 44 2 Change data type See change data type in raster section 44 3 Export See save in raster section 44 4 Filters See filters in raster section 44 5 Mask by region of interest See mask by region of interest in raster section 44 6 Radiometric enhancement See radiometric enhancement in raster section 44 7 Clip See clip in raster section 44 8 Reproject See reproject in raster section O 2015 gvSIG Page 279 of 371 00 ee gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide 45 GVSIG HERRAMIENTAS R STER MULTIESPECTRAL 45 1 Principal components See principal compionents in raster section 45 2 Tasseled cap See Tasseled cap in raster section 2015 gvSIG Page 280 of 371 e O Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 46 SEXTANTE 46 1 Introduction Sextante is an opensource library of all the algorithms grouped in different blocks It is integrated within the gvSIG toolbox e 3D e Basic hidrologycal analysis e Basic tools for raster layers e Buffers e Calculus tools for raster layer e Costs distances and routes e Development e Fire modeling e Focal statistics e Fuzzy logic e Geomorphometry and terrain analysis e Geosocial e Geo
60. and multipoint Line and multi line Polygon and multipolygon Collection Layers with LRS Linear Referencing System format are not supported 74 4 Coodinate systems Oracle has its own cataloging system of coordinate systems and reference There is a relationship of equivalences between the Oracle system and the EPSG system that is included in the driver as a DBF file Transformations between coordinate systems are performed by gvSIG 74 5 Reading geometries The driver constantly runs geometric queries ie calculates at each moment what geometries intersect with the current gvSIG view for which it is imperative that exists in the database a spatial index associated with the column in question If there is no index an error window Is displayed and is not possible to add such a table or view to the gvSIG View On the other hand the driver needs to set an unique identifier for the records of the table or view which is not possible for certain types of views In case of this problem the driver will detect it and an error message is also displayed making it impossible to load that view of the database in gvSIG 2015 gvSIG Page 359 of 371 Le gvSIG asociaci n When you export a layer to an Oracle database at the end the process will ask whether you want to include in the table the current coordinate system of the View gvSIG 2 2 User guide 74 6 Dumping gvSIG layer to Oracle 2015 gvSIG Page 360 of 37
61. as output Instead of the textbox that was used to set the filepath for output layers and tables a checkbox and a text box are found If the layer generated by the algorithm is just a temporary result that will be used as the input of another algorithm and should not be kept as a final result the check box should be left unchecked Checking it means that the result is a final one and you have to supply also a valid description for the output which will be the one the user will see when executing the mode Selecting the value of each parameter is also a bit different since there are important differences between the context of the modeler and the toolbox one Let s see how to introduce the values for each type of parameter Layers raster and vector and tables They are selected from a list but in this case the possible values are not the layers or tables currently loaded in the GIS but the list of model input or the corresponding type or other layers or tables generated by algorithms already added to the model Numerical values Literal values can be introduced directly on the textbox This textbox is a list that can be used to select any of the numerical value input of the model In this case the parameter will take the value introduced by the user when executing the model String Like in the case of numerical values literal strings can be typed or an input string can be selected Points Coordinates cannot be directly introduced
62. be downloaded The validation button allows you to confirm that the coordinates are correct when you click on it if the X Ycoordinates tabs have right values they become green 2 After this we click on OK and the WFS will be added to the View 11 6 Adding a WCS The steps to add a WCS through the window Add layer are 1 Connecting to the service SA e File WMS WCS O WMTS Ge0DB OSM PostGIS Raster server tto nsidc orq cgi bin atlas north service WCS request GetCap p _ Refresh cache li Connect Use of local tile cache Name I The National Snow and Ice Data Center NSIDC Atlas of the 4 Cryosphere is a map server that provides data and information a pertinent to the frozen regions of Earth including monthly climatologies of sea ice extent and concentration snow cover extent and snow water equivalent in addition to glacier outlines permafrost extent and classification ice sheet elevation and jaccumulation and more In order to support polar projections the Atlas is divided into two separate map servers one for the Northern Hemisphere and one for the Southern Hemisphere In addition to providing map images and source data through Open Geospatial Consortium Inc OGC protocols WMS WFS and WCS a dynamic iweb interface for exploring these data is also available at ghttpi nsidc org data atlas If you have questions comments or suggestions please contact NSID
63. console command or with the context menu by selecting Centre that opens a window for entering the coordinates 28 15 Insert regular polygon To draw regular polygons indicating the number of sides if it is inscribed or circumscribed and the centre of the polygon The regular polygon is a linear feature 2015 gvSIG Page 196 of 371 Es gvSIG P gvSIG 2 2 User guide er asociacion This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Sides Number of sides for defining the polygon You can enter them using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Sides 2 Inscribed or circumscribed It allows to indicate if the polygon is inscribed or circumscribed to the circumference which defines it from the console command or with the context menu selecting nscribed or Circumscribed 3 Centre You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Centre that opens a window for entering the coordinates 28 16 Insert filled rectangle To draw rectangles defined by two points of the opposite corners The filled rectangle is a poligonar feature This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 First point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates o
64. dai asociaci n e 1 Tables and fields name options It allows us to select if we want to move identifiers to lowercase and spaces Once this is set press the Next button Connection settings Dre Note that the user name and password must match case sensitive with that recorded in the data base 2 Connection settings It allows us to define the connection parameters of the PostGIS database to which data are exported Once this is set click on the Next button Nombre de tabla Where insert the data O Insert data in a existing table Los datos se insertaran usando los nombres de columna que coincidan con la tabla origen dejandose al valor por defecto para los que no haya valores en la tabla origen Seleccione la tabla a usar 2 Create a new table Enter the schema Enter the table name 3 Table name It allows us to select if you want to insert the data into an existing table or in a new one Once this is set click on the Next button O 2015 gvSIG Page 89 of 371 pee ee gvSIG asociacion C gvSIG 2 2 User guide Primary key Primary key header Create a primary key gt Create a serial primary key Enter the name of the primari key O Use a existing field as p
65. end the selection press Enter 2 Column number To indicate the number of columns of the matrix from the console command or from the context menu selecting Column number 3 Row number To indicate the number of columns of the matrix from the console command or from the context menu selecting Row number 4 New point This point will be used as the movement centre for defining the matrix You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Indicate new point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 5 Distance between columns It allows to indicate the distance between the columns of the matrix from the console command or with the context menu by selecting any of the two options insert point or distance value 2015 gvSIG Page 198 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n 6 Distance between rows It allows to indicate the distance between the rows of the matrix from the console command or with the context menu by selecting any of the two options insert point or distance value 28 21 Insert polar matrix To copy a feature a determined number of times in a polar matrix This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously
66. enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Second point that opens a window for entering the coordinates Q Y o cancel 2015 gvSIG Page 182 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide Es gvSIG lasociaci n 4 Select between delete or keep the original geometries The aimed option can be indicated in the command console or with the context menu Delete original geometries keep original geometries Cancel 27 3 Internal polygon To delete internal parts of one polygon It generates an island polygon This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To end the selection press Enter 2 Select one tool from the ones used to insert features to draw the internal polygon or cutting area 27 4 Explode geometry To break down one multigeometry into geometries The resultant geometries will have the same attributes This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To end the se
67. from the use of certain tools is shown in the status bar The 3 4 and 5 components are resizables dragging its edge to the right left and for the Locator and the TOC from up down 2015 gvSIG Page 52 of 371 ND ee 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n 11ADDING LAYERS 11 1 Introduction A layer is a dataset with geographical information which might be stored in different formats vectorial or raster files remote services databases See Supported formats There are different options to add a layer to a gvSIG View e With Add layer clicking on the Add layer button or in the menu View Add layer Menu Button a a New project Ctri N ES Open project Ctro H Save project Ctrl 5 E Save s5 Ctrl Shift S Open WMC Exit Ctrl e Copy Cut a layer from another View With a right click on the layer you can access to the contextual menu with options to Copy or Cut a layer With a right click on the View s TOC where we want to paste it we access to the option Paste e Drag and drop a layer from a file browser to the gvSIG View When using the order Add layer in one session gvSIG will automatically return to the same location from where data for the View was selected When the layer is added a window with different tabs is opened Eo Add layer File WMS WCS WFS WMTS GeoDB OSM PostGIS Raster Add Each tab belongs to a differen
68. gqste nasa goviwmsiwms Server Type WMS 1 3 0 Title Summary Remote sensing imagery fram NASA Earth Observations NEO Properties Format Mone selected SRS None selected Format of info by null point Server Type WMS 1 3 0 Previous Met 1 Click on Next 3 Layers It allows users to access to the available layers in the WMS server and select the one you wish to load 2015 gvSIG Page 59 of 371 NN A gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n o Add layer File WMS WES WES WMTS GeoDB OSM PostGlS Raster Information Layers Styles Dimensions Formats Layer name Blue Marb leNG Blue Marble Next Generation LA ib Fi y ut nl ha D 10 all E G Average Land Surface Temperature Might l Average Sea Surface Temperature 1985 1997 AVH t Bathymetry E Blue Marble Next Generation 1 Blue Marble Next Generation L Blue Marble Next Generation Topagraphy and Bathymetry E G Carbon Monoxide Blue Marble Next Generation __ Show layer names Server Type WMS 1 3 0 Previous Newt Cancel 1 The available layers are shown We select the ones we want for our WMS layer We can double click on a layer and it will be automatically add 2 or to click on the Add button 3 List of layers that we are adding We can change the order in which they appear using the up down arrows 4 You can select to keep the struc
69. gvSIG asociaci n Bl centro_2002 jp2 B2 centro_2002 jp2 B3 centro_2002 p2 io e The order can be changed with the Up and Down buttons The currently selected row go up or down a position in the list Bands can also be deactivated in the resulting image with the check of the row If the row is marked will appear in the output if it is not not taken into account e Options tab Layer names NewLayer_5 Create a layer for each band Save on disk automatically o Layer names Name of the resulting layers In case of several layers that is to say there is a layer for each band of the source image will get the same name but with numbers at the end xxx For example if the layer is called NewLayer and we have 3 result appears NewLayer_1 tif New Layer 2 tif and NewLayer_3 tif o Create a layer for each band Creates an output raster for each source raster band o Save on disk autimatically The layer is saved in the specified path If we do not mark this option s the layer s generated will be temporary 38 4 Change data type Allows to change the data type of a raster Available from the export raster bar button and the geoprocessing toolbox The interface is as follows 2015 gvSIG Page 252 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide le asociacion j Change data type N Layer valencia2002 Datatype Input BYTE Output BYTE Decimal to integer Trunk Major to minor
70. gvSIG henceforth set up it is very simple There are available installable binary to gvSIG for Linux 32 bits Linux 64 bits Windows 32 bits compatible with Windows 64 bits There are portable versions of gvSIG for each of these three options The portable versions don t require setting up just download and unzip them to run gvSIG and begin to use it You can find binary and portable version in this link http www gvsig com en products gvsig desktop downloads 1 2 Installation step by step The set up process is similar in both Linux and Windows The only extra precaution we must take into account when using Linux is make sure we have an execution permission in the downloaded file In Ubuntu in order to give permissions to our files we must to select the file right click and open Properties Check in the Allow executing file as a program box Step 1 Select the installation language When executing the set up file a pop up window will appear which allows us to select the installation language Spanish or English Select language and click OK 0 Language Selection Please select the installation language K Cancel Then another dialog window will ask us if we want to install gvSIG Click Yes 2015 gvSIG Page 15 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n o Install gvSIG desktop C This will install ev5lk desktop on your computer Continue
71. homefalvaro Testdata rastenlan bouldr tm lan Geographic coordinates Upper left 468019 0 44414940 Lower right 478729 0 4427594 0 Upper right 478729 0 4441494 0 Lower left 468019 0 4427594 0 Pixel size X 10 0 Pixel size Y 10 0 X Rotation 0 0 Y Rotation 0 0 Origin Band 1 Type Byte Colorlnterp Undetined Band 2 Type Byte Colorlnterp Undetined Band 3 Ty bouldr_tm lan 19 2 General To change the general raster properties lt sets a scale range for the image visualization set the NoData values check and recalculate the statistics of the image The interface Is 2015 gvSIG Page 133 of 371 ND De gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG Scale range Not show the layer when the scale Greater than 1 Less than 1 I Lil oe mm _ _ e lt i Ll dl e _ E a ll mm Ll Ll T adot E Ea gE E E E E E E TE iL Draw the NoData values transparent lValue Not defined l I Save Delete i i I Default value Restore Statistics Minimum 128 0 EE Maximum 127 0 l RGB minimun 0 0 l RGB maximun 255 0 i Media 90 20579234091718 l I Varianza 820 8445601519743 l l i I Bamd 2 Minimum 128 0 Maximum 127 0 RGB minimun 0 0 g RGB maximun 255 0 h Recalc statistics L asociaci n Scale range To hide the layer when the display scale is above or below the defined ranges
72. indicate the error warning threshold 2015 gvSIG Page 247 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n 38 EXPORT TO RASTER 38 1 Save View to georeferenced raster It allows to export the view as a image in georeferenced tiff format Available from the export raster bar button When launching the tool we are shown a first message indicating that you must select the area of the View to export Clicking the mouse on the first point and drag and drop in the second the rectangle that will contain the Vista area to be saved is defined Once defined area a window with the tool options will be displayed The interface is as follows E s Real coordinates LJ Xx 725 606 545 Y 14 372 557 53783 O Xx 726 374 269027 Y 4 371 917 76792 2 Selection by pixel Height Pixel size 15 99424777 Selection to print Size of the output raw 0 0 MB File File Seleccionar Apply Close e Real coordinates Coordinates of the points that define the area selected in the view Allows to modify these coordinates manually e Selection by pixel and to print Allows to define the characteristics of image resolution It has limited the maximum size of the output image 20 000 pixels by 20 000 so if tried to save a larger image gvSIG will show a warning message to the user to check the input parameters and try again 2015 gvSIG Page 248 of 371 A Tre 9 gvsic gvSIG 2 2 User guide
73. inside but the access to that folder has different routes on each machine for instance local directory is home user data and the server is in mnt data This option will replace in the configuration the access paths to the local machine for the server ones Relative paths taking as origin the service configuration file the mapfile if it is MapServer you can set a route to resources from it using a ShapePath variable From that file and adding the indicated for the ShapePath variable the rest of the resources accesses will be built 2015 gvSIG Page 358 of 371 NN ET 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n 74 ORACLE SPATIAL LOCATOR 74 1 Introduction It allows access to both Oracle Spatial tables as Oracle Locator both from version 9i if they have a column of geometries stored as SDO GEOMETRY type SDO geometries stored GEOMETRY The Oracle Spatial Locator Support extension is installed using the Addonn Manager 74 2 Metadata The driver lists only tables with their geographic metadata in the USER _SDO_ GEOM METADATA view Since it has the metadata for each table the interface makes use of them and automatically provides the geometry columns As row identifier uses the ROWID which is an unique descriptor for each row usied by Oracle internally and ensures correct identification 74 3 Data type Data are supported in 2D and 3D of the following types Point
74. layers tools Se gvSIG Tools Multispectral raster Tools for raster layers Gall Models H E Scripts SEXTANTE d 3D H Basic hydrological analysis Basic tools for raster layers Buffers Calculus tools for raster layer E Cost distances and routes Developme nt Fire modeling 4Focal statistics it Fuzzy logic Geomorphometry and terrain analysis ed z COI l La The main parts are e gvSIG Geoprocesses It includes geoprocesses for vector and raster layers e gvSIG Tools Raster tools which are not geoprocesses e Models To execute and create new geoprocessing models e Scripts To execute and create new geoprocessing scripts 2015 gvSIG Page 257 of 371 A l gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n e SEXTANTE Geoprocessing library integrated in gvSIG It is classified in different functional groups of geoprocesses Depending on the available data it will be possible or not to execute a determined algorithm When there are enough data for executing it the name will be in black If not in grey Apart from the geoprocesses the main components of the interface are 9 Toolbox 3 Tools l E Algorithms g gvSIG Geoprocesses 3 S Wector layers tools Clip a g gvSIG Tools Ej Tools for raster layers a clip SEXTANTE S Basic tools for raster layers Tools for vector layers i Clip Clip by rectangle 1 The bottom part of the toolbox has a text box to
75. o Format In this case jpg Water Color o Name user s choice a name that identifies the server Eg Water Color Stamen o URL http tile stamen com watercolor o Levels 17 o Format jpg 11 8 Adding a spatial database GeoDB It allows the user to access spatial databases in a simple and unified way to different suppliers gvSIG stores the different sessions connections This way is not necessary to enter the parameters of each server to which we connect every time Similarly if you open a project file that has some connection to databases we only will be asked for the password The steps to add a GeoDB layer to the View are File WMS WCS WFS WMTS GeoDB OSM PostGIS Raster Choose connection yo e 1 Connect 1 Select GeoDB tab 2 Click on the button to create a new connection If there already created connections we simply select it from the drop down When we create a new connection the following window opens 2015 gvSIG Page 77 of 371 ND TT gvSIG 2 2 User guide O Connection parameters 3 We Connection name TestBD wwe PostgreSQL o Note that the user name and password must match case sensitive with that recorded in the data base indicate the connection parameters Connection name user s choice Connector Select the type of database which we want to connect to from the drop down menu MySQL PostgreSQL PostGIS JDBC Server Server
76. of the cursor When the central window cursor moves around the view varies the position where the lens is focused and when the window size is changed change the zoom level In the upper left corner of the window the coordinates of the mouse cursor appears 3 Control Points A control point is an entity that provides the correspondence between a geographical coordinate and a pixel coordinate Control points are represented in the reference view as green squares and in the view of the image as green circles A control point is associated with a row of the table To add a new control point click on the New button in the table control Create a row with coordinates 0 O in both views and the tool Move point is activated Now clicking on the View the mark is where we punctured The information can be found in the points table relating to each point is e Point number e World X Y X Y coordinates in the reference view They are automatically generated when you click on the View They are also assigned directly typing the value in the table e X Y image X Y coordinates in the view of the image They are automatically generated when you click on the View Also they are assigned writing directly the value in the table e Error X Y e Root mean square The quality of the geometric correction can be estimated based on the root mean square RMS and the error contribution of each point e When the RMS contribution of a point is high it may
77. ooo oem Bands Information Transparency Enhance General Also it has to be taken into account that first the remote services have the connection properties and second the properties depending on being vector or raster data In the WFS case the connection properties are in the Properties window in the rest of service cases the two options connection properties and properties depending on data are separated in the context menu The connection properties of a remote service allow us to access to the window Add layer of the remote service and modify the connection parameters for that layer Some add ons can add new layer properties 2015 gvSIG Page 103 of 371 ND i i DE 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n 16 VECTOR LAYER PROPERTIES 16 1 General The layer properties show the description of the layer and allow to specify the drawing properties linked to the scale Mame ne 10m _populated places Scale range 2 To show always O Don t show the layer when the scale To be over 1 Maximun scale To be under 1 Minimum scale Properties Extent EPSG 4326 view_projection Upper 82 48332318035943 Lower 29 982893861 34616 Left 1 9 5899888396897 Right 19 3832035881 O18 Data origin ne 10m_populated places file home alvaro TallerLAC Earth 10m populated place Type Point2D It s possible to set the automatic visualization of the layers within a dete
78. or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To end the selection press Enter 2 Origin You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu that opens a window with two options for entering the scale origin 2015 gvSIG Page 185 of 371 TT lll gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n Origin Value Origin Point Cancel 3 Scale factor or reference point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu that opens a window with two options for entering the scale origin Scale factor or reference point Value Scale factor or reference point Point Cancel 4 Second reference point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Second reference point that opens a window with two options for entering the coordinates In the case of using the angle graphically a visual aid will be available indicating the value of the scale factor and the possible result 27 11 Simplify geometry To simplify a geometry keeping the essential form of the geometry This tool is available from the Layer Modify men
79. order in which they appear To delete a filter from being executed double click on it in the list or click on the Delete filter button 2015 gvSIG Page 227 of 371 NN C gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n 5 Name of the layer It allows to indicate the name of the layer that will be created when clicking on Apply creating a new layer The number of filters that have been added affects the performance If it is applied only on visualization each render that is made of the view will be penalized by the execution of the filters If a new layer is generated it will just be penalized the execution of the creation of the layer later the layer will be drawn as quick as if no filters had been applied In this kind of cases it is adviced to create new layers whenever you can Other times it can be not so advisable to create a new layer For instance if we have a big orthophoto and we need to modify the brightness to create a new layer will take long time However if it is applied only on visualization the filter will be applied every time but over a smaller dataset so that it will be quicker The user will decide in which cases to create a new layer and in which cases to apply only on visulization The available filters are Enhancement Brightness Filter of Brightness Active Brightness o It modifies the brihtness value of the layer It can be varied by moving the position of the slider or b
80. priority of visualization Move up Move down and label them separately To set up the properties double click on the labelling row to define Label class properties window will open 2015 gvSIG Page 123 of 371 Li i Tee 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide ai asociaci n Classes Method Define classes of features and label each differently Label priority Label type to use Simple label Add Filter Label expression Visible esate Hove down POP_EST Options For more information see Advanced labelling Common options 18 6 Advanced labelling Define classes of features and label each differently Labelling by scale For more information see Advanced labelling Common options 18 7 Advanced labelling Opciones comunes Properties To set up the labelling properties This dialogue screen is available in all the manual labelling methods The interface contains 2015 gvSIG Page 124 of 371 eee Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n O Label class properties Name Labelingl Font Format Font SansSerif Fixedtext size 14 0000 Pixels y Inthe world 7 5 Fit on text area i a Lad Le l Calor a Use halo E l l AH 00 Eh 00 l Halo width 3 E AA a a a ee we eee ee Field number Label expression Verify 1 11 NAME e Add I l Remove l iw Label features in this class
81. state it is activated or deactivated depending on the previous state of snapping Men H Disable snapping F3 In the window View Properties Snapping you can select the layers to be used for snapping ds View properties A Xx General Snapping Tolerance pixels Mark the layers to be used for snapping Selected Layer name Max features editing ne 10m_acmin_0 cou ne 1Om_ rivers lake c ne 10m_acmin_1 stat 1Om_ urban areas Cancel Apply ok If the snapping tolerance is 4 pixels the two features which are at a distance equal to or less than 4 pixels will be joined into a common coordinate 2015 gvSIG Page 200 of 371 EO eee 9 gvsic gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n The values of the column Maximum number of features in memory can be changed to accelerate snappings in edition It is the maximum number of geometries with which you want to work in memory The types of snapping can be defined in the window Preferences in the Snapping section Snapping activate reference to objects Apply Symbol Type Priority Properties Final point Mearest point Pixel adjusted Central point Quadrant adjusted Intersection poi Middle point Perpendicular po Tangent point Tolerance pixels v O O E 0O M o O o w lt O A O b m 29 2 Grid The grid is a pattern of dots that extends along the drawing area It allows to align the objects and
82. the configuration of the WMTS layer You can select the Refresh cache option which will search for information from the server in the local host This will only work if the same server was used on a previous occasion 2 Information It shows the service information 2015 gvSIG Page 64 of 371 Ne 7g gvSIG asociacion gvSIG 2 2 User guide C Information Layers Styles A Dimensions Formats MY Service information server https Mgbank gsjjp seamiessftilemap basichWNWISCapabilities xml Server OGCVWMTS Type Title 205301 8 4 Le ABBE WMTS EER summary seamless geological map with unified legend was created at a scale 011 200 000 covering the entire Japanese Archipelago This was accomplished by harmonizing regional geological maps that were compiled in various ages We have two version ofthe 1 200 000 seamless geological maps such as basic version and detailed version based on the number of legend The basic version of the map is based on the legend of 195 while the number of the legend of the detailed one is 387 In this WMTS the geographic coordinates are based on geodetic reference system also known as the Japanese Geodetic Datum 2000 1602000 JGD2000 is based on the GRS80 ellipsoid that was defined by MIGG Properties Format fone selected Server Type OGC WMTS Previous est 1 We click on the Next button 3 Layers It allows you to access to the set
83. the label to modify its text The label is the text that will appear eiin the TOC legend By default the label will be the same than the value on that field 5 Buttons area Add all Add Once the Classification field and the Colour scheme are selected clicking on the Add al buttons all the different values are shown by assigning a symbol colour different to each one Clicking on Add you can add new values to the list Delete all Delete Allows to delete all delete all or some delete of the elements that make up the legend Symbolology level To define a specific order of visualizing the elements This is important when some geometries of the same layer intersect because defining that order can make to some symbols appear over others It s activated clicking on the verification space The value 0 will be the symbol under the rest The value 1 will be over that and so on 2015 gvSIG Page 108 of 371 A Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n s O Symbol levels _ Draw symbols in specified order Symbol Description q AS su ME OS su HA SUP oo IA sune 17 4 Categories Expressions It shows layer elements according to a certain filtered expression Other values memm Symbol Walue Label HS POP_EST 10000000 p J New filter expression Modify Filter Expression D
84. the layer 3 Selected features Option to use only the selected features in both layers 4 Only dissolve adjacent geometries 5 Summary function It is possible to apply a summary function over the numeric values of the linked features Minimum Min maximum Max summation Sum and average Avg A field will be created for each function in the output layer When the geoprocess finishes the new layer will be included in the TOC 2015 gvSIG Page 269 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 41 10 Fuse spatially This geoprocess works with one only input layer whose geometry type must be polygon This process analyse each input geometry and builds a unique polygon with all geometries which intersects each other The attribute table will have an identifier field of each feature Furthermore other layer with only alphanumeric data will be created This alphanumeric table will contain the table of the input layer and it will include an ID field with a reference to the polygon in the first layer In this way each polygon in the first layer will have a reference to each feature in the second layer rr The interface Is Inputs Vector layer Input layer hidro andalucia Options Selected geometries Input cover d Outputs Fuse spatially vector Save to temporary file pe Fuse spatially_Table vector Save to temporary file a 1 Input layer 2 Selected features input layer Opti
85. the parameter to define the density of the straight lines which define the curved geometries A high Flatness number can make that the curved elements will be visualized as polylines In Preferences Flatness its value can be modified 2015 gvSIG Page 180 of 371 Ee gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide 09 ici 27 TOOLS FOR MODIFYING FEATURES 27 1 Introduction To modify elements of one layer in editing mode These tools require a selection of features geometries where to apply the tool Once the tool is executed press the right button to access to a context menu which allows to select between the different tool options indicate points with its exact coordinates Let s see all the available tools Icon Tool Shortkey Description Ay Geometric To create symmetries of existing elements Symmetry Internal polygon To delete internal parts of one polygon Explode Break down geometry Move geometry creating an island polygon Break downs a multigeometry in geometries Move the geometries between two specific points Rotate geometry Rotate the selected geometries a specific angle Copy geometry To copy and move existing geometries of Split geometry To split one geometry using a cut option cm Split line in one To split one line in one specified point point aj Scale geometry To modify the size of one geometry using a scale value a Simplify geometry To simplify the geometry preserving the essential s
86. the same time With Esc key any edition operation will finished 26 2 Start Finish editing To start or finish the editing session the layer must be active The tool changes itself depending on the status of the edition When the layer is not in editing mode it will be Start editing and when the editing session has been initiated it will be Finish editing It is available from Layer menu in the context menu of the layer and in the specific button bar Menus Layer Start editing Attribute editor eee Query Attributes table ta Export to Properties Export to anotation zoom to layer ral Start editing Malata lame A k Icon Tool Shortkey Description i Start Finish To start of finish the edition editing 26 3 Command console To introduce orders and editing options using the command console It is located at the bottom part of the View frame when the layer is in editing mode The console can be resized and hidden 2015 gvSIG Page 179 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n ESILA insert Line First point insert Line Second point insert Line finished insert Line First point To write down the commands use the keyboard Once the selected option is indicated press Enter for being registered 26 4 Flatness In gvSIG any curved geometry is made up of one determined number of sections Flatness is
87. to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To end the selection press Enter 2 Total feature number To indicate the number of features of the matrix from the console command or from the context menu selecting Total feature number 3 Rotate features To indicate if the features will be rotated or not from the console command or from the context menu selecting Yes or No 4 Centre This point will be used as the centre of the matrix You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Centre that opens a window for entering the coordinates 5 Angle between features It allows to indicate the angle between the features of the matrix from the console command or with the context menu by selecting any of the two options insert point or distance value 2015 gvSIG Page 199 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n 29 DRAWING SUPPORTING TOOLS 29 1 Snapping The Snapping lets you to create entities that are connected to each other more accurately By activating the snapping the pointer is set to other geometric features when it is close to them and within a specific tolerance This allows to locate a feature concerning other locations This tool is available from the Edit Enable snapping menu or by the key F3 Each time you run this tool it will change its
88. v A ne _1lOm rivers lake centerlines yy o gt v 3 ne 1 m_ admin_ QO countries oe Antarctica pe _ East Asia amp Pacific ee Europe Central Asia pu Latin America amp Caribbean a Middle East amp North Africa feo E North America South Asia o EJ Sub Saharan Africa 4 NEL_HR_LC A layer is accompanied by an icon that indicates its type file remote service group etc a legend that can display hide and a display activation box 14 2 Enable disable layers lv A ne_10m_populated places When a layer is active we can take action on it gt y v A ne 10m rivers lake centerlines i A Af A layer is activated when its name appears in bold o oe vw A ne _10m_admin_0 countries E o A layer is activated clicking with the left mouse button E Europe Central Asia on it pu E Latin America amp Caribbean From the menu View Set all layers to we have access to Active and Inactive orders We can activate or deactivate all layers of the TOC 14 3 Display hide layers al de Alne_10m populated places When a layer is visible it is viewed in the map area A layer is visible when you have marked the checkbox A layer can be visible and inactive or active and hidden 2015 gvSIG Page 99 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n 14 4 Display hide legends 14 Alne_10m populated places We can show or hide t
89. values To use them type in the corresponding parameter entry instead of a value expression For output data objects type the filepath to be used to Save it just as it is done from the toolbox If you want to save the result to a temporary file type If you want to save the output to a permanent file type the output file 48 5 Running a model Models can be executed from the command line using the model command which has a sintax similar to the runalg command In this case you must use the file name where the model is stored instead of the name of the algorithm as the first parameters The remaining parameters depend on the particular model you want to execute much like in the case of running a simple algorithm with the runalg command 48 6 Managing layers from the command line interface You can perform some operation with layers from the command line interface like the following ones e Close a layer Use the close layer_name command e Change the no data value of a raster layer Use the setnodata layer_name new_value command e Change the name of a layer Use the rename layer_name new_layer_name command 48 7 Adjusting output raster characteristics Just like when you execute a geoalgorithm from the toolbox when it generates new raster layers you have to define the extent and cell size of those layers By default those characteristics are defined based on the input layers You can toggle this behaviou
90. various edition orders in the same action It gives information about the made orders with the name and time This tool is available from the Edit menu and from the relevant command bar The interface Is 2015 gvSIG Page 202 of 371 ND i Ts C gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n commands stack costas ge X H R E Command _selectionSet date Nov 9 20 E Command selectionset date Nov 9 20 E Command selectionset date Nov 9 20 With the slide bar the orders to undo can be selected The bar can be moved up and down 2015 gvSIG Page 203 of 371 Le Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 31 ATTRIBUTES EDITOR 3 1 Introduction Permite editar los atributos alfanum ricos de los elementos de una capa desde la Vista Al pulsar sobre un elemento de la capa activa mostrar un formulario con todos los atributos de dicho elemento permitiendo su modificaci n It allows you to edit the alphanumeric attributes of the layer elements from the View When you click on any element of the current layer a form will be shown with all the attributes of that element allowing users to modify them It Is available in the Layer Derivative Geometries menu or in the right button bar Menu Button bars Attribute editor Query ta Export to Pvrart ta arnat atinri The tool interface has the following elements id ja 1 1 ob PI
91. views spherical and flat associated with the same 2D view at the same time If all requirements are met just do click on menu or bar button and a new Flat 3D view will be created O 2015 gvSIG Page 305 of 371 NT A gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n File Selection Layer Show View Map Tools Window Help pDoOgoxaMasacQ eros REKSEAOCYTOSY O XVa e MaE 5 Visor 3D Sin t tulo 1 gf E 9 Vista Sin t tulo 1 Sw A esp _provinci E Off Glahe e In the same way as Spherical 3D view when a Flat 3D view is created the layers of 2D view are converted to 3D layers to show them at 3D view 54 3 Synchronize view This tool allows users to synchronize a 3D view and an associated 2D view When a 3D view is created it is linked with the 2D view This permits to register 2D layers changes to copy and apply them to 3D layers For example if we change the symbology of one 2D layer and then we click on Synchronize view button the converted 3D layer will be affected by this change Moreover If we have two 3D views open at the same time both 3D views will be synchronized The synchronization of views can be done in two ways manual and automatic The manual way is run when clicking on bar button or Synchronize view menu entry The automatic way starts when the Auto synchronize layers option is activated in 3D View properties 54 4 Synchronize viewport This tool allows
92. we indicate ten to maximum level of detail plugin only will calculate ten levels of details If we indicate zero as maximum and minimum level 3D Plugin will calculate the best number of detail levels in relation to resolution layer Zero level resolution it indicates the relationship between resolution and zero level of detail If we indicate zero level resolution to high layer will be shown with more resolution at zero detail level If we indicate zero level resolution to low layer will be shown with less resolution at zero detail level Tile size it indicates size of tiles Elevation elevation part only is available if elevation loading mode is selected If Elevation mode is selected vector layer will have the following properties 2015 gvSIG Page 309 of 371 2 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociacion Loading mode Elevation Tile configuration Level of details Minimum Zero level resolution e High Tile size Height Width Elevation r Elvation field A i Units Meters NoData A Cancel When we select elevation model elevation group properties will be enable with other options to indicate 1 Elevation field it indicates the field that has elevation values 2 Units it indicates the units of elevation values Two options meters and feet 3 NoData it indicates NoData value All points that have indicated NoData value will be transparent at 3D view 3D Raster l
93. we move the slide bar to increase or decrease the values or we introduce the data directly in the text box which is next to the slide bar Grayscale Filter of Gray scale Active Bands R It allows to select bands to which apply grayscale Mask 2015 gvSIG Page 233 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 9 gvsic asociaci n Filter of Transparent area Active Transparent ance Nombre ROI 1 447416548641 Inverse Alpha It allows users to introduce a certain level of transparency to a preselected interest area When the layer does not have a region of interest a warning message will appear It s necesary some ROI to apply this filter Please go to the dialog lt lt Interest regions gt gt and select the last one Ticking the check box labeled as Inverse will result in the opposite effect all of the image except for the ROI will be set to the specified transparency level 36 2 Radiometric enhancements Allow the alteration of digital levels of the image using functions to adjust them to determined processes such as the case of improved visualization Allows definition of linear step and nonlinear functions Available from the Layer menu the enhancement button bar and the geoprocessing toolbox The interface is as follows O 2015 gvSIG Page 234 of 371 QD O gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide y asociaci n as pl al Histograms Preview Output Levels RGB
94. window Add layer are 2015 gvSIG Page 75 of 371 pee AAA AA gvSIG 2 2 User guide 4 69 gvSIG asociaci n File WMS WCS WES WMTS G OSM i PostGIS Raster server Map Quest Name url Levels Format ap Quest http oatilel mqcdn com tiles 20 ona Open Cycle Map http tile opencyclemap org c 16 iq Map Quest Open Aerial http otilel mgedn com stiles 20 q Mapnik http tile openstreetmap orgf 18 prng F l Server l Name Map Quest url http Xoatilel mgedn com tiles 1 0 0 map Levels 20 Format png oK Cancel Select OSM tab Select one of the tile services available in OSM Out of the four available 3 represent OSM vector information Map Quest Mapnik Open Cycle Map and one represents aerial photos Map Quest Open Aerial When we select a service from the list its characteristics are automatically filled in In this section we can also add a new server s features or update an existing server Click on Ok and OSM layer is added to View Some of the additional OSM tile service are offered by Stamen Two of them could be added to the list of existing services Terrain service Name User s choice a name that identifies the server eg Terrain 2015 gvSIG Page 76 of 371 ND O 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide isociaci n Stamen o URL The server URL is http a tile stamen com terrain o Levels In this case 17
95. 00 1 300 000 10 000 1 200 000 2 000 1 100 000 To s000 1 000 000 900 000 7 000 m 800 000 sooo H 700 000 5 000 600 000 500 000 4 000 400 000 3 000 300 000 2 000 200 000 100 000 1 000 a El Ea Li El Ca a ALMER A C DIZ C RDOBA GRANADA HUELWA JA N M LAGA SEWILLA PROVINCIA m Population Population 72 4 Edit plots Properties To edit the properties of the Chart document This tool is available from the Chart menu in its relevant button bar and in the Properties button of the Project Manager Charts The interface is 2015 gvSIG Page 348 of 371 O rrr gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide o Chart preview PROWINCIA ALMER A C RDOBA GRANADA HUELVA JAEN MALAGA CS ALMER A C DIZ C RDOBA GRANADA HUE PY JA N M LAGA PROVINCIA A A O O O A O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chart variables Is visible Warlable name Chart type Renderer type Data Table name typ YE WY Chart X PlotChartRendererBasic Table of attributes Bars chart BarsChartRendererBasic Table of attributes j CAdvanced configuration 10150 O Sra Cancel Accept 1 Chart preview It is a preview of the plot to insert in the Chart document 2 Chart variables Table with all the created plots It is possible to Icon Tool Description a Create plot To create a new plot a Edit plot To edit a plot The Create plot window
96. 02 31 ATTRIBUTES EDITOR crisis ainia 204 CA ae UCO e e R an 204 32 DERIVED GEOMETRIE Scissor 205 OZ pike HOG CLOl icnarticevagucaunanasevcpuvaeatinnenevaseadevatedataneshs danteniiabecsevaiasyasaineonanedns 205 33 RASTER TOOLS tirar oc 208 Sl NOA UCO Darren ia 208 34 RASTER EATER oir 213 BA ils Select rastras abet earners 213 A2 o ro CE E ESEE a e R 213 34 3 Colour table sssessssssesssessnnsosrsnnnnennsnansrnasrnnsnnnnnsnnnnnnsssonnannnnerrennanennne 217 34 4 Information DY DOM ivan idad isos 220 34 5 Area Of Interest oococcococococcccococonconononancononannnrononnrnnronnnnrnnrnrnannnrnarnannnnnnes 221 34 6 Generate OVEFVICWS cccccceecececeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeseeeeaeeseenesesneeaeentaneaneags 222 34 7 ANALYSIS VIQW cccccccececeeeeeeeseeceaeateeeaeeaeeeeaeaeeneaeseesaeeananesntentaneaneaneags 222 33 MULTISPECTRAL RAS VER oscars 224 35 1 Principal COMPONENLGS ccecececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeetseseeataeseentaneaneags 224 BOs VASSCICG COD OPE COOPU 0 0C Pu TO 226 36 ENFANCEMEN TE iia aa 227 0 ROB FU Sismo 227 36 2 Radiometric enhancementsS essresrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrrrrrne 234 36 3 Mask by region of intereSt sssesersrrrerrrsrrrsrrrrrresrrrrrrerrrerrrerrrerrrrene 236 37 GEOGRAPHIC TRANSFORMATIONS sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 238 37 1 Reproject lay r sesssesrrsrrrsrrrsrresrrrerrerrrerrrerrrerrnerrnerrerrrrerrrerrrrrreerrre 238 B72
97. 1 O gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide Es 75 S SMICA O 2015 gvSIG Page 361 of 371 2 AA 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 76 PORTABLE VIEW 76 1 Introduction The Portable View extension lets you work with a new document that is a view with basic query options in which the rest of tools has been removed With this you can convert a view in portable view and vice versa Besides you can also package this portable view as a gvSIG complement The generated gvSIG package contains both the generated data files and the portable view configuration Using the complement manager another user can install that portable view in his gvSIG Therefore this extension has two main uses e Have available a query view e Allow portability distribution of a gvSIG View containing all associated information legends labeling map scales The Portable View editor y Portable View viewer extensions are installed using the complement manager Administrador de complementos 76 2 Create a Portable View To create a View you must complete the following steps 1 Create a view Vista 2 Set up the View CRS layers legends labeling map scales 3 Run the command Vista Portable Crear a partir de la vista Portable view Create from view Menu Create fram View 4 Anew window that lets you enter the View identification characteristics is open 2015 gvSIG Page 36
98. 149 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n a gt J 3 ATM Admin Advertising Airport Alert Bank Camera Car Repair Casino Casque audio Box 2 Box 3 Briefcase Bulk Bathymetric 1 Bathymetric 2 Coastline Green 1 Green 2 Highwayramp Highway Major Road INV II IN NN Road Stream Street 1 Street 2 Topographic 1Topographic 2 Citroen Yellow Apatite Blue Autunite Yellow Beryl Gren Cantaloupe Chrysophase Amethyst Heliotrape Deft Blue Electron Gold Fire Red Flame Red Fushia Pink Ginger Pink 21 5 Crime Mapping Symbology CMS This symbol library is based on the CMS The Crime Mapping Symbology designed by the US Department of Justice for covering the symbology needs of the Police Department CMS includes two core systems Computer Aided Dispatch CAD and the Records Management System RMS o o o Abuse Aqqravatedassault Alarmarmedrobbery Armedrobbery Bombthreat Childluring Domesticdisputeweapon Domesticviolence Drivebyshooting Explosives Pi b e od y Major streets Police beats outline Ramps City limits outline Crime sector outline Major highways Residential Streets City limits boundary Background yellow Beat background Beat boundary Black ee i I I as City limits Crime reporting sector Grey Highway or ramp Park or open area 2015 gvSIG Page 150 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp lasociaci n 21 6 Emergency Symbol
99. 2 of 371 ND A 2 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n J New Portable view compilation 2222222222222 e ap E Information Identifier a Mame Version Countries y Based in Natural Earth data There are 247 countries in the w Fe E a e i 0 y Description y 5 Once you have entered the information click next Next Then a validation window is displayed that warns you from possible errors in the portable view definition O 2015 gvSIG Page 363 of 371 A 1 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide le asociacion g New Portable view compilation no or xi Portable View Validation Click on the Finish button Terminar And automatically is generated and opened the new document Vista portable Once a portable view is generated it will be listed in the Gestor de proyecto Vista portable project manager portable view dd Project manager e a BB Document types Charts Portable View Portable View 76 3 Interface The portable view interface is a simplification of the View document including query tools only and specific actions menu of the portable view The interface is as follows 2015 gvSIG Page 364 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n File Show View Map Portable View Tools Window Help pbDaoxaMaasess e g Pocos me wa a eo o nano eae eaan onan ar a mana anon anna aaa are aaa aa oo B
100. 2 rid 0 Use of local tile cache 1 Select a table from the list and the Subdataset paragraph will update 2 Click on OK and our View information will be added 11 10 Add event layer It allows to create a point layer from a table which has the points X and Y coordinates as fields We must have a table in the project to run this tool It is available in the View Add event theme menu in the Tools Transforms Create menu and from the corresponding button Icono Herramienta Tecla r pida Descripci n f Add event theme It allows to create a point layer from a table which has the points X and Y coordinates as fields The interface will guide us through the steps to add a event theme 2015 gvSIG Page 81 of 371 Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide P asociaci n 0 Apply a transform Select a data store Enn _ 1 Select data store It allows the selection of the table we want to add as a layer of events from the available table lists of our project Once selected we must click on the Next button 5 O Apply a transform Select the transformation parameters Field containing X coordinate Field containing Y coordinate Geometry field name Projection EPSG 23030 2 Select the transformation parameters It allows us to indicate the table fields wich contains the points X and Y coordinates The default projection is the View
101. 5 asc Type Raster layer X min 262846 525725 X max 277871 525725 Y min 4454025 0 Y max 4464275 0 Cellsize X 25 0 Cellsize Y 0 0 Rows 410 Cols 601 gt describe spatialCorrelation dbf Type TableNumber of records 156 Table fields Distance Moran c_Geary Semivariance 48 3 Getting information about algorithms Once you know which data you have it is time to know which algorithms are available and how to use them When you execute an algorithm using the toolbox you use a parameters window with several fields each one of them corresponding to a single parameter When you use the command line interface you must know which parameters are needed so as to pass the right values to use to the method that runs that algorithm Of course you do not have to memorize the requirements of all the algorithms since SEXTANTE has a method to describe an algorithm in detail But before we see that method let s have a look at another one the algs method It has no parameters and it just prints a list of all the available algorithms Here is a little part of that list as you will see it in your command line Shell bsh algs acccOSt Accumulated cost isotropic acccostanisotropic Accumulated cost anisotropic acccostcombined Accumulated cost combined 2015 gvSIG Page 291 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide ita asociacion 69 gvSIG
102. 7 2004 snow extent May 1967 2005 snow extent April 1967 2005 Greenland bedrock elevation snow extent March 1967 2005 snow extent February 1957 2005 snow extent January 1967 2005 seasonal snow classification sea ice concentration December 1979 2007 sea ice concentration November 1979 2007 sea ice concentration October 1979 2007 Greenland snow accumulation 1971 1990 Greenland surface elevation sea ice concentration September 1979 2007 Show layer names Server Type WES 1 0 0 Next 1 Double click on the coverage you want to add to the View 2 Click on Next 4 Formats It allows users to choose the image format with which the request will be made and the reference system 2015 gvSIG Page 74 of 371 a LLL gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n Information Coverage Format Time Parameters Select format GeoTlFFFloat32 nearest neighbor T Use interpolation method Select CRS Server Type WES 1 0 0 Previous ext 1 Select the format 2 Select the CRS It must coincide with the CRS of the View 3 Click on Next 5 There are tabs such as Time and Parameters that can be disabled or enabled depending on the service 6 Click on OK and the WCS will be added to the View 11 7 Addin a OSM service The steps to add an OSM service by means of the
103. 71 aa AAA gvSIG asociacion gvSIG 2 2 User guide C 73 PUBLISHING 73 1 Introduction Its aim is to enable a process automation for the maps publishing services trying to obtain results as true as possible to the original work made in our gvSIG The Publish extension is available for downloading in the Addons manager and it can be found in View Export and in its relevant buttonbar Menu Button bar Set all layers to gt ae Navigation New layer Add layer Alt 0 B Add event theme Locator setup Properties a Export view to server configuration Accessibility gt gt Subir al servidor C Save view to georeferenced raster Ctri Alt w fe Export view to image Ctri Alt Y The available tools are Icon Tool Shortkey Description amp Export View to Export View to server configuration mapfile server MapServer configuration ae Upload to the Upload the resource to the server server 73 2 Export View to Mapfile The interface Is O 2015 gvSIG Page 352 of 371 Euge eee Ge gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n O Export view to server configuration Default output folder IN Advanced options Advanced options Service TinyOWS MapCache MapProxy Paths Choose services MapServerWMS MapServer WCS MapCache MapServer WFS TinyOws MapProxy Service data Service name Mapfile
104. 71 aaa le gvSIG asociacion gvSIG 2 2 User guide f 6 PROJECT MANAGER 6 1 Interface Project manager is the window where all documents that are part of a gvSIG project are organized J Project manager l Document types View Table View Session properties Session name Untitled Saved in Creation date Oct 16 2015 Project manager window consists of four main areas 1 Session properties It is reported the main session data name location and gvsproj file creation date Button Properties gives access to a new window where you configure the properties of the session In session window Properties we can change the color selection By default gvSIG uses yellow color to indicate that an item is selected 2015 gvSIG Page 32 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 2 4 9 gvSIG asociaci n Path Creation date Oct 16 2015 Modification date Oct 16 2015 Color selection ug Comments Session name Untitled Cancel Apply OK Type documents Shows the documents available in gvSIG The typical installation of gvSIG shows four types of documents View Chart Map and Graphic some compplements can add new types of documents Clicking on the icon of one of these documents change its lighting indicating that it is the active document activating the 3 and 4 areas for this type of document By
105. 8 ER Dm Table settings Mame s ferracarrilAndal SOL restriction a e Selection of information ID field gid o We select table s we want to load When a table is selected box Table s columns will be updated showing selected all fields available from it s attribute table we can unselect those we don t want to load o Table s configuration In this box we can change the name that the table will show by default the same name of the table Allow to indicate a restriction with a SQL expression and select field ID e When defined all fields we click OK and the tables will be added to the project O 2015 gvSIG Page 318 of 371 gvSIG asociacion gvSIG 2 2 User guide C 59 TABLE TOOLS 59 1 Introduction These tools are the ones for making actions in the tables The tools are available from the Table menu and its relevant button bar The function Join is also located in Tools Transforms Create Menu Button bars W Stop editing O a d HA RE m AI 1 Pow fa Export to xy El Remove row Add column eae ra ER EAM 0 Rename column alll 5 A Remove column ES Column manager Add measure ws Add X and Y Sort ascending ort descending nd and select duplicates a 5 F Field calculator Create join Create link E 2 e ca gt Statistics Properties Let s see all the available tools Icon Tool Shortkey
106. 8 Export framework 2 0 100 2165 plugin y Native preferences w Formats CSV file format support 2 0 100 2282 plugin OGE di w Formats DBF SHP file format support 2 0 100 2281 plugin Portable View PL ec Formats DGM file format siinport p BaBe k Pe fa fe 0 212 BMH 1 Raster Remote Services 3D View Symbolocy Symbols y able 3D View allows user to create 3D views Categories e code org gvsig view3d app J Types VA RT ENANA 2 lt Back Cancel The Add on Manager interface is divided into four parts 1 List of available add ons The plug in name version and type are indicated The verifcation check boxes allow to distiguish between available white or already installed add ons green 2 Information area concerning the selected plug in 1 3 Area that shows the Categories and Types in which the plug in is classified When we choose a category or type from the list a filter that runs on 1 shows only the plug ins related to this category or type 4 Fast filter Enables a filter from a text string entered by the user 2 2 Introduction In the add ons list we can see several icons that we should know O 2015 gvSIG Page 24 of 371 HN A gvSIG asociaci n e gvSIG 2 2 User guide A The plug in is only valid for Linux 32 bits The plug in is only valid for Linux 64 bits 7 The plug in is official 33 The plug in is offici
107. 949 MN 1 98739269 8 5 13973E8 198 739 269 313 973 000 Compute intervals Add Remove all Remove 1 Fields Options to define the intervals Classification field Drop down menu to chose the numeric field to make the classification Interval type There are three different intervals e Equal intervals Calculate equal intervals from the values found in the selected field to make the classification e Natural intervals The number of intervals are specified and the sample of this number is divided into this number according to the Jenk optimisation method regarding to the natural localization of intervals e Quantile intervals The number of intervals are specified and the sample is divided into this number but putting them into groups according to their order Number of intervals To indicate the number of intervals of the legend 2 Begin color and End color To select the colours that will be used to make the graduation The initial colour will be for the lower values and the final one for the higher ones 3 Compute intervals Once all the previous options have been defined this button will calculate the intervals defined by the legend Add To add new ranks 2015 gvSIG Page 112 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n Remove all Remove To delete all remove all or some remove of the elemens that make up the legend 4 To modify the symbols labels and intervals 17 7 Quant
108. C 0 OCA Za OM e E EOS E E E 239 37 3 ASIQN POJ CtlON cccccccceeeececeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseseeeeanaeeneaetaneateaneaneateaneags 240 3 A CONC el ala IEMU 05 PP E anemia inet E 240 30 EXPORT TO RASTE Roads 248 38 1 Save View to georeferenced rastel ccccccccececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeneaneas 248 Eo o OCS ort cx nes eo o o OE A 249 BO CMO WNC aotearoa eel 250 2015 gvSIG Page 9 of 371 2 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide gt asociaci n 304 ERange data Y DSi dni aaa 252 38 5 Export View to IMAagQ cococcocococcccononacancononancononoranroronnnnnrononarannncnnnnnnnnes 253 39 GEOPROCESSIN Gomis 254 39 1 INTO UCI ON picanccutuanciseinsyeenenaninaoxintaareniesiniasashantataauranatasviinamesitawntiamedin 254 40 TOOLBOX creeren ocna EEEE 257 AOL MOA O errre EAE ETE E E acres 257 41 GVSIG GEOPROCESSES VECTOR LAYERS ssssnnssssnnnnnnnnnnnnn 262 41 1 Group Dy a eld sirrien iEn aeii 262 Aee PUN Taea E E E 263 AAS E eA E TEE E EE EE EEA E E 264 41 4 Convex Hull oooooccccccococcoconoconoccononacrononorarrororarrernnnrnrreronarnnronsnnrnnanonan 205 O PP o CG O E TN 266 41 6 SUC NCS o o A 267 ALTA AT Si Grane annette nd O UN o REI 267 aro DTO rente merca apriete 208 41 9 DISSOIV CG incarcaiaiicansinanid ariadna rider indigo diia 209 AL LO Puse Spatial riada io aia io edi 270 41 11 IntersectiON oocccocococonconononanconononanronranrnronorarrcnnrnrnrronnnnrnnronarrnrnnnnanan 270 Mes Mer Orcos sa 271
109. C User Services at 1 303 492 6199 or nsidc nsidc org The development of this map server application was supported by NASA s Earth Observing System _ oy Server 8 0 0 YIG bla J E I I 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 i iT is at a a s A ti wath a AA a UY a wi J Baia its al 1 Select the WCS tab 2015 gvSIG Page 72 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n 2 Introduce the URL server The URL will be stored and it will be shown in the drop down box for other occasions 3 Click on Connect 4 When the connection is made a welcome message from the server appears not always 5 The information about the type of server with which the connection have been made to is shown at the bottom of the box 6 When the connection is made the Next button is enabled Click on it to start with the configuration of the WCS layer 2 Information Information i Coverage Format Time Parameters Service information Server htipv nside org cgi bin atlas_nornth service WCs requestGetC apahbilitie a Server WCS 1 0 0 Type Title Summary The National Snow and Ice Data Center NSIDC Atlas of the Cryosphere ij that provides data and information pertinent to the frozen regions of Earth monthly climatologies of sea ice extent and concentration snow cover exte water equivalent in addition to glacier outlines permafrost extent and clas sh
110. D view The transformation of layers depends on the loading mode indicated by user There are two loading modes available raster and elevation On the one hand raster loading mode indicates that layer will be converted to raster image All kind of supported layers by gvSIG can be converted to raster image On the other hand elevation loading mode indicates that layer will be converted to elevation model Only raster layers with at least one band can be loaded as elevation Afterwards how to indicate loading mode with other 3D properties will be explained in this document An example of raster layer loaded as raster colored layer and as elevation DEM at the same time 2015 gvSIG Page 304 of 371 q Te gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n File Selection Layer Show View Map Tools Window Help ovaoxa4geseaa RF OSA 140950 Xe 3 Visor 3D Sin t tulo i 7 i 2 M leon 4326 E v ee lt 20 Km aj es AAA ele NS a E all Jal Altitude 63km Off Globe 54 2 Flat 3D view This tool allows users to create a Flat 3D view from active 2D view To create a Flat 3D view it is necessary to meet the following requirements e One 2D view active with at least one layer added e Active view projection must be EPSG 4326 e There is not a Flat 3D view created with the active view There can only be one 3D view with the same type at the same time Due to this there can only be two 3D
111. Description a Export to To export one table a Field calculator To make calculations with the fields of the Table Remove join To undo the join between two Tables Ea T Create join To create one join between two Tables 2015 gvSIG Page 319 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide E E A E El oa a Remove link Link Add X and Y Print Table Start editing Finish Editing Select by attributes Add row Remove row Add column Rename column Remove column Column manager Sort ascending Sort descending Find and select duplicates Statistics O 2015 gvSIG 69 gvSIG asociaci n To remove the link between two tables To create one link between two tables It adds two new fields to the table with the X and Y coordinates length and latitude Only available for the attribute tables To print the table To start editing one Table Only available for alphanumeric tables To finish editing one Table Only available for alphanumeric tables To make a selection by attributes To add one row to the table To delete the selected row To add one column to the Table To rename one field To delete the selected field To access to the column manager To sort ascending alphabetically the table depending on the data of the selected field To sort descending alphabetically the table depending on the data of the selected field It detects and selects th
112. IG There is the option to select other image to represent the geometries when they are selected in the View with the path Image of selection It allows displacement in X e Y depending on the X axis and Y axis of the image 20 4 Editor Simple line symbol Selecting the Simple line the interface with three tabs is O 2015 gvSIG Page 142 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide C asociaci n s O Symbol property editor Preview Properties Type Simple line Units Pixels In the world Simple line Arrow decorator Line properties Color E e E 2 8 4 Ok Cancel In Simple line symbol are the options to select the colour of the line the transparency its width and the offset As the point layers it is possible to create a line composed by different lines or line symbols Line properties is to modify the join and end style along the fill pattern Join style End style fm ht Wr m D Bevel Miter Round Butt Round Square Fill pattern bombo aaa ala a Aaa Clear e Join style There are three types bevel miter and round e End style There are three types butt round and square e Fill pattern By default gvSIG shows continuous lines Modifying the fill pattern is possible to create dashed lines 2015 gvSIG Page 143 of 371 ue l 1s gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n How it works Click on the grey section ov
113. IG The symbology panel shows different options depending on the selected legend type The different legend types will depend on the layer type and the attribute type There are some legends that they can only applied with numeric attributes The interface contains the following elements fa Tategories Draw all features using the same symbol l gt Features i 1 l Complex symbolo y Unique symbols jiy mbor Multiple attribute Quantities iI Choose symbol Symbol levels Legend Label text that will appear in the TOC 1 Symbology types 2 Visual representation lt changes depending on the selected symbology 3 Description It changes depending on the selected symbology 2015 gvSIG Page 106 of 371 DD O 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp lasociaci n 4 Options To define the characteristics of the symbology It changes depending on the selected symbology 5 Buttons to apply for the defined symbology 6 Buttons to save or load one legend 17 2 Unique symbol All the entities of the layer will be represented with one unique symbol Click on Choose symbol to access to the Symbol selector There is an option to introduce a label text that will appear in the TOC TOC To apply for the legend click Apply and Accept To change the symbol or the layer colour in a fastest way double click in the symbol that appears in the TOC and the Symb
114. IG Page 68 of 371 quee eee gvSIG 2 2 User guide 9 gvsic asociaci n Information Layers Fields Options Area Service information server htpinside orglegi binfatlas noarth sernvica WFs server Type WFS 1 1 0 Tithe Atlas ofthe Cryosphere Northern Hemisphere a summary The National Snow and Ice Data Center NSIDC Atlas of e the Cryosphere is a map server that provides data and a information pertinent to the frozen regions of Earth including monthly climatologles of sea ice extent and concentration snow cover extent and snow water equivalent in addition to glacier outlines permafrost extent and classification ice sheet elevation and accumulation and more In orderto support polar projections the Atlas is divided into two separate map servers one forthe Northern Hemisphere and one for the Southern Hemisphere In addition to providing map Images and source data through Open Geospatial Consortium Inc OGC protocols WMS WES and WS a dynamic web interface for exploring these data is also available at http nsidc org data atlas lf you have questions comments or suggestions please contact NSIDC User Services at 1 303 492 6199 or nsidcganside org The development of this map server application was supported by NASA s Earth Observing system EOS Program under contract WAS5 03099 and Was developed using MapServer an Open Source WES version 1 1 0 1 0 0 Features cache none Previous Next
115. L Expression lt Back Je Export Cancel 2015 gvSIG Page 92 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n f 10 Export options They allow to indicate if we want to export all elements of the original layer those that are selected or those that meet certain selected criteria In the latter case it allows us to enter filter expressions Click on the Export button to inish the export gvSIG 2 2 User guide 12 3 Export to annotations It allows us to export a vector layer to an annotation layer It is Available from the menu Layer Export to annotations The interface will guide us through the export process as o aa A new layer can be created using this tool based on an already existing layer which allows to perform advanced labeling r t changes the visualization of the selected layer showing the value of one of its fields Duplicate control London Choose the field to label Paris NAME lt Back Net gt comenzar J _ cancel 1 Choose the field to label First we have to select the field from which the annotations will be created Once this is set click on the Next button 2015 gvSIG Page 93 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n a paa aX O Keep the default values to use the values which are shared by all the attributes of the layer Select the fields which store the values in order to customize the label aspect Choose the field used to store the slope of the lab
116. Park Service Cartography E Bench Court Fountain 1 Fountain 2 Library 1 Library 2 Playground Post box 52 A ra f E Post office Prison Public building 1Public building 2 Recycling Survey Point Telephone Toilets disabled oo ge rn A amp A 3 FR fo Fug mn A f i 1 A O iow nai f q i i il i our A y i T j W J W j y y Avenue Bus Coast Ferry HighwayRailwayl Roadl Road2 Road3 Streetl Street Street3 Street4 Tram Walkl Walk no i ie roy Walk3 Waterl Water2 Water3 _ 100 _ A Airport Allotments Basin Brownfield Commercial Construction Farm Forest Fuel Grass E j f Y a n A Horticulture Industrial Landfill Military Parking Quarry Railway Recreation Reservoir Residential 21 17 POI Cities This library includes a set of symbols that represent the main attractions of a city parks airports subway stations different types of shops museums monuments It is based on the symbology that MapBox project uses and specifically in the library called Maki O 2015 gvSIG Page 156 of 371 eee gvSIG 2 2 User guide Es gvSIG W TE bk gt 9 Airfield Airport Alcohol shop America football Art gallery Bakery Bank Bar Baseball Basketball Beer Bicycle Building Bus ars yi i IN F1 BorderlBorder2Border3 Road Road2 Road3 jj jf _ 6 Areasl Areas2 Buildings Buildings2Buildings3Buildings4 Landl Land2 Landa Landa Lan
117. S cccccoconocccconoconconononancnnonanonnononananrononanrnnonsnnnrnrenanens 284 47 3 Definition Of The WorkflOW oooccococccconocconocconaccononannonconannanrnnrnnnannrnnss 285 47 4 Editing the model IN the CANVAS cccececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeaeeneeeatenaaes 288 47 5 Saving and loading MOAEIS cccececececeeeseeeeeeseseeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeaeentaneaneas 288 426 COMMAND LINE iaa arras eeen 290 AO PPP e A oO E ETAN 290 48 2 Getting information about data cccococccconononcnconenannnnonnnncrononanannonnnos 290 48 3 Getting information about algorithmMS ococccconcccccocononononnonnnnnnnannnnos 291 48 4 Running an AIGOLITNM cece eee eceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneateesesatatsesnentaneas 292 405 0 RUNNING a 10 G Claas iacopier erro E E EEE 294 48 6 Managing layers from the command line interface ccceeeceeeee eee ees 294 48 7 Adjusting output raster CNAracteEriStiCS cccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeetesuesuesateaes 294 49 BATCH PROCE SSIN Giran 296 AL VOC CEI NN nia tddi 296 49 2 Parameters taDlOuenisniricanna aca ds 296 49 3 Caracter sticas de las salidas r SteT cocccccconononoronnnnonorenoncnnonorenonnnnnans 298 49 4 Ejecutar el proceso por lOtesS ocoococcccoconocccconoconcononanancnnarancononananonons 298 49 5 Procesos por lotes con capas ya CargadaS cccccccconononcnconannnnonnnnnannnnos 298 S0 HIS TO o ba 299 DOLO CUCU Nur os 299 Db CATALOG ridad 300 52 WEB MAP CONTEXT
118. Service description Powered by gvSIG 2 1 publish extension Cancel epi e Default output folder Selection of the local work directory It can be a new folder empty or one already createdv for joining different works in one unique project If the output folder where the poject will be saved is not empty the app gives the following option o QOverwriite it will create all the files for the project and change the previous files if this is required o Add if new informaction want to be added to an existent project without losing the previous information o Cancel e Advanced options Enable this option for seeing the advanced options grouped in 4 tabs o Service Choose service Selection of services We can check as many as we need performing the publishing once Each service will create a subfolder with its name in the project directory and inside of the subfolder all the files needed for that concrete service will be stored Service data to indicate the name under which the service will be displayed to customers and the description in the same form o TinyOWS Options of the TinyOWS service 2015 gvSIG Page 353 of 371 gvSIG asociacion gvSIG 2 2 User guide Service data Online resource http 11127 0 0 1 cgi bin tinmyows Schema directory usr local share tinyows schema URI NS http 1127 0 0 1 o MapCache Options of the MapCache service cache drectory A Scale d
119. UCA Na aia 162 163 23 2 LOSA MAA 163 23 3 CONter VIEW TO PON Encinas iia 164 23 4 Locate DY attribute ooooccccocococcccononocconononancononannnrononnnanronarnnrnnennnnnnnnns 165 23 LOCA COLIMA totes reir sacas 165 23 6 Finding by Gazetteer ooooccccocococcccononccconononaccononancnronnnnnnnronannnrenarnanannnnes 167 24 CONSULTING TOOLS iris aena Rna 170 2A Ae MEO GU CON o 170 ZA Zs MIO eaten dable ida decia 170 Ps O IIS 171 24 4 Query GIST ARC E rtve 172 24 5 VOTE IPPO e o O E o eo E 172 23 SELECTION TOO Sisi iii 173 2 MOLE AO nato 173 LOs RISE OY DU O iii erro aaa s 174 25 3 Select by layeT ooococcccocococcononononconononconononancononornnronnnnrnrnnrna rra rnarnannnnnnes 175 DA Sele e GUUS PREM OO o tenet 177 26 GRAPHIC EDITING TOOLS ssssssssssnnuuusnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 178 2651s INTOdU CH ON render 178 20 2 Start Finish COMED seeren E NANE 179 20 3 COMMANA CONSO Sarmiento rarddn 179 26 4 FIA CS S asserts sausrpinanraacianensncauaeraurintaessetaseauneegnangeqaneeraaranabisanveneemenaies 180 27 TOOLS FOR MODIFYING FEATURES asasnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnn 181 ZF Nes MTOA UC Nara tones tere tomers generac rane aor EE TT 181 DBs Sy A oe E 182 7 A E E UU o 183 27 4 Explode DSOMSUY rior traia dido e etica 183 27 5 Move GEOMEULLY ccccccccc cece cece e eee ron rra n ron nr narran nan nn narran nn na nnnnna nenas 183 27 6 Rotate O COMBI ussssrasrio rodas 184 27 7 Duplicate GEOMELLY ccece
120. USER GUIDE GVSIG 2 2 gvSIG asociaci n Os n gvSIG Www a 9 gvsic gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n gt g vS G Calle San Vicente Martir 84 5 A 4 3sociaci n 46002 Valencia Espa a Informaci n general info gvsig com www gvsig com Tel fono 34 963516309 FAX 34 901 021 995 Distribution List There are different distribution list in order to facilitate communication with all the people who are interested in gvSIG project both users and developers http www gvsig com en community mailing lists All proper names of software operating systems hardware equipment etc of this course are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations This document ts distributed under license Attribution ShareAlike 3 0 Unported CC BY SA 3 0 2015 gvSIG Page 2 of 371 ND 8 Tee asociaci n gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide Index Ll INSTALLA TON rra a a R a a 15 Wi Coda UON ea E E E S 15 1 2 Installation step DY St ep sssesssesrrsrresrrrerrrsrrrsrrerrrrsrrrerrerrrerrrerrrreerrrne 15 2 ADDONS MANAGER ccoo 24 2 1 Interface and DehaviQUTF occcoccccccononnnconenonanconononnnrononananronnnnnenenanarnnnrnnnnes 24 Lal OROA O nE EE EAE EEE A 24 3 INTRODUCTION iran tacna terio 26 3 1 What can we do with gvSIG Desktop cococococcoconccoccoconononcononannnnannnnons 26 4 FINDING OUT ABOUT GVSIG sssssssssnuunnnsnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnu
121. Use the list to select one of the coordinate inputs of the model 2015 gvSIG Page 287 of 371 q 00 Tre Es gvSIG 4 gvSIG 2 2 User guide er asociacion e Bands The number of bands of the parent layer cannot be known at design time so it is not possible to show the list of available bands Instead a list with band numbers from 1 to 250 as well as the band parameters of the model is shown At run time SEXTANTE will check if the parent raster layer selected by the user has enough bands and the given band has therefore a valid value and if not it will generate an error message e Table field Like in the previous case the fields of the parent table or layer cannot be known at design time since they depend of the selection of the user each time the model is executed To set the value for this parameter type the name of a field directly in the textbox or use the list to select a table field input already added to the model The validity of the selected field will be checked by SEXTANTE at run time e Selection The list contains in this case not only the available option from the algorithm but also the selection inputs already added to the current model Once all the parameter have been assigned valid values click on OK and the algorithm will be added to the canvas It will be linked to all the other elements in the canvas whether algorithms or inputs which provide objects that are used as inputs for that algorithm 47 4 Edit
122. User guide dai asociaci n gvSIG desktop Setup Java installation ev5lIG needs a valid Java installation version 1 5 or newer to run Please select a Java installation to use ae Java installation found in the system at usr bine java C Select another Java installation to use Install a new Java Funtime Environment ev5IG desktop 2 2 0 o Back f Next 3S Cancel Step 4 Select location Then we must indicate the destination folder where gvSIG will be installed By default the program creates User Home If we click on Examine we can modify the folder location Once the location option is confirmed click on Next O 2015 gvSIG Page 18 of 371 A gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n C 5 gvSIG desktop Setup Choose Destination Location Where should gvSIG desktop be installed Setup will install evSIG desktop in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Falder _ _ honsa1varo gvSTG desktop gvsTG desktop 2 2 0 Browse s ev5IG desktop 2 2 0 Cancel Step 5 Start set up The installer will show us a set up start message x gvSIG desktop Setup Start Copying Files Review settings before copying files Setup has enough information to start copying the ae a Files If you want to review or change any settings click Back
123. Window Help Set all layers to Navigation New layer GP Add layer Alt O E Add event theme Query b g Hyperlink Properties _ Locator setup Export It shows the following window 2015 gvSIG Page 165 of 371 8 rrr gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide Pr asociaci n C 3 Configure locator A Locator layers Remove layer Edit style We can add layers which will be part of the locator map From this window we can delete layers or edit the legends Locator elements e Red box It is the View zoom e Horizontal vertical axis indicates the central point in the View zoom Some of the properties are e Clicking on the locator with the primary button mouse and dragging the frame zoom and displacement of the View e Clicking on the locator with the secondary button mouse and dragging the View frame will be displaced maintaining the scale 2015 gvSIG Page 166 of 371 Se Eee C gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n 23 6 Finding by Gazetteer A Gazetter or geographical dictionary is one group of data in where all the toponyms are related to its geographic coordinates It is a geographic index for identifying the geographical place of one toponym Available in the specific toolbar Aa Let s see all the available tools Icon Tool Shortcut key Description a Finding by Gazetter Se
124. _ South Asia a KE EJ Sub Saharar Delete layer we e NEL_HR_LC oa Bring to front Copy Cut Export ta al Add layer 14 7 Remove layers 1 Activate the layers we want to to delete 2015 gvSIG Page 100 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n 2 We click on one of the active with the right mouse button in the context menu and select Delete Layer 14 8 Copy Cut Paste layers 1 Activate the layers that we want to cut or paste 2 We click on one of the active with the right mouse button and select the context menu Cut or Copy layers 3 We click the right mouse button on the view TOC in a space where there are no layers the context menu and select Paste We can copy and cut layers in the same view or between views 14 9 Groups of layers gvSIG allows to group different layers in a cluster This is useful because it enables that we can have in the TOC many layers without taking up much space therein enabling group those that are related This option allows operations simultaneously on all the layers that form the group To make a grouping 1 Activate the layers that we want to group 2 We click on the right mouse button on one of them and from the context menu select Grouping layers 3 Anew window where the name of the Association shall indicate opens fs Rename Name Grouping OK Cancel 4 Press OK and the layers will appear g
125. a spatial database GeoDB cccccccoconcccnconocncnnannnnnannnnnnnnannnnnnos 77 11 9 Adding PostGIS Rasta 79 LLL Add event la Vel arabic ninaa 81 12 CREATE A NEW LAYER sausnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnssnnnnunnnnnnunnsnnnnnnnnnnnnn 84 12 1 New L y ANP nn A 84 L22 Layo o E 85 12 2 1 Export layer to a shp forMalt ccocccoccoccconcocnconoonnonnnonnonnconnnancononnononnonnnns 85 12 2 2 Export layer to a Oxf fOrMat oocooccccocooonononcocnconnconnconnnanocononanonnnnnnannanons 86 12 2 3 Export layer to a kml forMat oocooccoccncocncocncocncocococnnocnnononnnnnnnonnnnnnnnons 87 12 2 4 Export layer to a PostGIS formalt occcoocccccccocccocnconocnononncononnononcnononnnns 88 123 EXPOR LO ANNOIN Sm vcinieratatseariacstar occa EA 93 13 SUPPORTED FORMAN Siria tinta 95 A a Pa o o E E E E PET 95 Liz ROMOLO SO VICO Sra na 97 LS DataDaSS arica beni iaaiva ciao asian 98 14 TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC COMMON OPERATIONS WITH LAVER Sao ai ii 99 14d MOGUCOM anar sien sineeeisunetaea rout 99 14 2 Enable disable lAVEIS ccccccccceeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeateneeeesneaneanes 99 14 3 Display hide lAYEIS cccccececeeeeeeteceseeteneeesestenegestetestaeseateaeseanentanes 99 14 4 Display hide ICO Stata tiraera 100 14 5 Change the order of layers in the TOC ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneaes 100 14 6 Layer context Me U de 100 14 7 Remove LAYESIS cccccceceececeeeeseeteeeaeseeeeaeatseeneaea
126. a una ejecuci n individual del geoproceso y las celdas de esa l nea contienen los valores de los par metros de la misma forma que stos se introducir an en los distintos campos e Por defecto la tabla contiene nicamente dos filas Puede variarse el n mero de stas utilizando los botones A adir fila y Eliminar fila situados en la parte derecha de la ventana Haciendo doble clic sobre una celda puede editarse su contenido y teclear el texto que se desee introducir Salvo que el par metro asociado sea un valor num rico o una cadena como tal aparecer en la parte derecha de la celda un bot n que permite introducir el valor del par metro de una forma distinta Con independencia del tipo de par metro si el valor que se ha introducido es correcto el texto correspondiente aparece en negro Si no lo es aparecer en rojo Una diferencia importante con respecto a la ejecuci n de una extensi n de la forma habitual es que todos los objetos de entrada capas raster capas vectoriales y tablas se toman directamente de ficheros y no del proyecto actual o la vista activa Por esta raz n cualquier extensi n puede ejecutarse como un proceso por lotes con independencia de cu l sea la ventana activa o la informaci n que contenga a diferencia de lo que sucede con esa misma extensi n si se llama desde la caja de herramientas Los nombres de los archivos de entrada se introducen directamente tecle ndose sobre la celda en ed
127. ackground color White is the color by default But you can change the View background color A new window with tabs for the different options of color selection will be displayed O 2015 gvSIG Page 44 of 371 up Te 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp lasociaci n s O Background color Swatches i HSV HSL RGB CMYK Recent LI 1 O l E _ E m EJ MOMO A EL PE Et Bees EEATT A A E e a a A EL ICI BREE ERs VES 0 0 O E EEE EET Se TES S 0 0 O A RETTENE EERTE EEATT FETTEN BENTE EEE _ VES A O Preview 7 Sample Text Sample Text ok Cancel Reset Current projection The default projection is EPSG 4326 You can select another projection It will display a new window see coordinate system topic Comments You can add comments about the View All options in this window only apply to the current document view In the dialog box gvSIG Preferences we can change the background color and the default projection Certain supplements plugins can add additional tabs to the View properties dialog box 2015 gvSIG Page 45 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n 9 COORDINATE SYSTEM 9 1 Change the View Coordinate System Each View uses a coordinate system to visualize the data properly It determines the map projection of the View The View coordinate syste
128. affic separation2 Tunnel Tunnel2 Waterfall 2015 gvSIG Page 154 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide L L L L L L L L L L LE L L LL L L L L L L L L L bE LLE L L LL L L L L E L L Buildings Buildings2 Casuarina group Cementery Conifer group Coral reef Deciduous tree group Eucalypt group Evergreen group Filao group Glacier Green 21 14 Numbers Library with numeric symbols This library is based on the symbols of Letters Numbers published by Little Web Things that contains beyond symbols from number O to 99 letters symbols in upper case of Latin alphabet text fonts from Data Deja View DDV called Circle Diamond Hexagon Pentagon Shield and Square that and the numbers icons belonging to the set called Red Orb Alphabet Icons of Icon Archive When using point symbols of set IwtMaplcons consider that by default it don t have applied an offset in y if wanted the vignette appears over geometric point we have to edit the symbol properties and add an offset in y of a half the size in our case as we set these symbols in size 32 we ll use an offset of 16 0 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 20 21 22 at LO Wa Wa Ma Ma Ma Waa Mu Must Wa Wa Waa Maa Ma Wa 0 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 15 2 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 3 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Maa a at a Vi aa Wat a vs Vi wa Wa Wa Wa Wa Wa 23 24 25 26 Zi
129. al and recommended for the proper functioning of gvSIG included in the typical installation O 2015 gvSIG Page 25 of 371 LS Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n 3 INTRODUCTION Gvsig Desktop gvSIG from this point forward is a Geographical Information System in free software that is a computer application aimed to represent edit analyze and manage information from the point of view of spatial relations The gvSIG licence is GNU GPL v 3 which gives the user the rights of free use study improvement and distribution The gvSIG firts version was born in 2004 within a project that consisted in a full migration of the information technology systems of the Generalitat Valenciana in Spain Valencian Regional Government Since 2010 the project is managed by gvSIG Association Developed under the values of collaboration and sharing knowledge gvSIG has evolved very quickly and in a few years it has become one of the most used applications to manage the geographical information Welcome to gvSIG 3 1 What can we do with gvSIG Desktop GvSIG is a sophisticated Geographical Information System and as such it is used to do every kind of work related to the territory management If you are curious about the different gvSIG uses don t hesitate to visit the website for cases of use http outreach gvsig org case studies The most common tasks to do with gvSIG are e To represent data spatially gvSIG allows yo
130. alg accflow Usage accflow DEM Raster Layer WEIGHTS Optional Raster Layer METHOD Selection CONVERGENCE Numerical Value FLOWACC output raster layer 48 4 Running an algorithm There is only one single command to execute algorithms runalg lts syntax Is as follows gt runalg name_ of the algorithm paraml param2 paramN The list of parameters to add depends on the algorithm you want to run and is exactly the list that the describealg method gives you in the same order as shown Depending on the type of parameter values are introduced differently The next one is a quick review of how to introduce values for each type of input parameter 2015 gvSIG Page 292 of 371 m 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n If the input is optional and you do not want to use any data object write e Raster Layer Vector Layer or Table Simply introduce the name that identifies the data object to use l e Numerical value Directly type the value to use or the name of a variable containing that value e Selection Type the number that identifies the desired option as shown by the options command e String Directly type the string to use or the name of a variable containing it e Boolean Type whether true or false including quotes e Multiple selection data type Type the list of objects to use separated by commas and enclosed between quotes For example for the maxvaluegrid algorithm Usa
131. allows to select the data type byte or double HSL gt RGB Filter of HSL gt RGB Active Conversion from HSL to RGB Filter of CMY balance Active cyan Magenta Yellow Luminosity CMY Balance It allows to modify the balance between Cyan Magenta and Yellow into an image that needs this type of equalization To do so we move the slide bar to increase or decrease the values or we introduce the data directly in the text box which is next to the slide bar The option of Luminosity is used to keep the level of luminosity in every pixel before the variation of CMY 2015 gvSIG Page 232 of 371 A a gvSIG asociacion gvSIG 2 2 User guide Filter of RGB balance Active Red O RGB Balance Luminosity It allows to modify the balance between Red Green and Blue into an image that needs this type of equalization To do so we move the slide bar to increase or decrease the values or we introduce the data directly in the text box which is next to the slide bar The option of Luminosity is used to keep the level of luminosity in every pixel before the variation of RGB Filter of HSL balance rive HSL Balance See rHue AO Luminosity p Saturation A Pee It allows to modify the balance between Hue Luminosity and Saturation into an image that needs this type of equalization To do so
132. although it can be modified Once the options are set we must click on the Next button O 2015 gvSIG Page 82 of 371 ie AAA A 2 gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide Apply a transform Apply the transform You have applied the transformation in a table The result of the transformation has a geometric attribute and it is possible to load it like a layer Load the transformation output like a layer Select the view to load the transformation 3 It allows us to indicate if we want to load the generated layer in one of the Views of the project Once we click on the Finish button the new layer is created and if appropriate added to the selected View 2015 gvSIG Page 83 of 371 Se EEE gvSIG asociacion f gvSIG 2 2 User guide 12CREATE A NEW LAYER 12 1 New Layer It allows us to create a new Shapefile layer It is available from the View New Layer menu The interface guides us through the steps to create a new layer 0 New layer wizard Output format Shape FF create new Shape layer Daetric 1 We must select Creat new Shape layer and click on Next button Output file 2 Output file It allows us to indicate the name and file path where the new layer will be saved Field definitions Define fields Name Type Length Geom type Dimensions CRS PE Mand GEOMETRY Geometry Not appli SURFA GEQM2D EPSG 23030 dl 3
133. alues of any of the available layers in the gvSIG project even if the layer is not used as input layer in the algorithm selecting it from a dropdown menu If it is not an automatic adjustment gvSIG checks that the layer to create does not have an excessive size that can be caused by an error in entering coordinates or cell size If the layer is very big it will show the user a dialog to confirm the layer Each geoprocess has a contextual help To view the contextual help of an extension you must be clicked in the help button I located at the bottom of the execution window of the algorithm or being selected in the toolbox click on it with the button right and select View help in the context menu that appears 2015 gvSIG Page 261 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n 41 GVSIG GEOPROCESSES VECTOR LAYERS 41 1 Group by a field This geoprocess works over one unique input layer The user will select a field for the association and the process will group the geometries according to the field chosen The interface Is Parameters Output region Layer ne 10m admin O countries Grouping field REGION UN Temporal axis Function Geometry O Set the first geometry O Creates a multigeometry with all geometries of a group O Spatial fusion of the geometries polygons only GroupBy Wectorial Save to temporary file a 1 Layer To select the input layer from a dropdown menu 2
134. ameters e Select the key of the first table Joining field of the first table e Select the key of the second table Joining field of the second table e Type a prefix for the first table Optional It allow to add a prefix to the fields of the first table e Type a prefix for the second table Optional It allow to add a prefix to the fields of the second table e Select the attributes to join Once all have been defined click on Next to access to the last panel 4 Apply the transform A message will appear saying that the transformation has been applied This last panel can be different if the join is with the attribute table of one layer which contains attributes of geometries or if it is with alphanumeric tables In the case of an attribute table it will appear the option to load the transformation output like a new layer 2015 gvSIG Page 322 of 371 Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n Apply the transform You have applied the transformation in a table The result of the transformation has a geometric attribute and it is possible to load it like a layer Load the transformation output like a layer Select the view to load the transformation Japan e Apply the transform You have applied the transformation in a table The result of the transformation DOESN T have a geometric attribute and it can NOT be loaded like a layer lt Back Finish Cancel The join can be deleted w
135. an set their values when executing the model The model itself is a SEXTANTE algorithm so the parameters window is generated automatically as it happens with all the algorithms included in the library e Definition of the workflow Using the input data of the model the workflow is defined adding algorithms and selecting how they use those inputs or the outputs generated by other algorithms already in the model 47 2 Definition of inputs The first step to create a model is to define the inputs it needs The following elements are found in the Inputs tabs on the left side of the modeler window Double clicking on any of them a dialogue is shown to define its characteristics Depending on the parameter itself the dialogue will contain just one basic element the description which is what the user will see when executing the model or more of them Vector layer Raster layer Add vector layer Add raster layer Geometry type Polygons Mandatory Mandatory Cancel OK pz Cancel OK Numerical value File or folder 2015 gvSIG Page 284 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide gvSIG asociaci n Add numerical value Description Numerical value 1 an ale LS Floating point Min value Value type s Add file or folder Description File or folder 1 File open _ Input is voxel data Type of input o Common options e Description What the user will execut
136. ancel e Point settings To choose between the label on the item or moved around In the second case the priority of the placement of the label around the dot is configurable To do this click on Change location and Symbol selector window will open Click on Properties to show a new dialog screen where the priority of placing labels around a point can be set up Using the buttons on the right and selecting positions of the chart we will prioritize what location will take the text in relation to the point e 1 High priority e 2 Medium priority e 3 Low priority 2015 gvSIG Page 128 of 371 ND Tre gvSIG asociaci n vSIG 2 2 User guide g g e 0 Forbidden O Edit style Name at the right top corner but all positions are allowed e Repeated labels To choose between Place one label per feature or Place one label per feature part multigeometries or Remove duplicate labels which will place a label by entity and if this is repeated it will only show one The interface for a line layer is 2015 gvSIG Page 129 of 371 qq AAA AAA 2 gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide s Placement properties Line settings Orientation O Horizontal Parallel O Following the line O Perpendicular Position 2 Above O On the line O Below Orientation system Location Location along the lines In the middle Dup
137. annnnnnnons 354 FIA UDI tO Se Ve niismaiia dias EN 356 74 ORACLE SPATIAL LOCA OR sssnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 359 TA E MALOU CUO erica riores a 359 2015 gvSIG Page 13 of 371 A gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide E a a 112 Metadata apo 359 74 3 Data e e tenes EEr NERE 359 74 4 Coodinate Sys CCS necne NA EARE 359 74 5 Reading geometrieS ssssssssessssrsssnsrnssrnnsnnnnrnasrnnsnnsosnssnnnnnnanerrennanae 359 74 6 Dumping gvSIG layer to OLracle cccecececeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetsesneeneeneas 360 75 SISMICA iia os 361 76 PORTABLE VIEW sra a 362 TO Lo M OCU ON rro pia 362 76 2 Create a Portable VieW oococcccocococconoconacconononnorononananrononnnnoronanannanrnnnnes 362 A PP UU Io eae renbuein 364 TO Ais EXPO VE Wide pide ciecadds caia ie 366 76 5 Open the Source VICW cccccecscececeseeceeeeeseseeceaeaeeneaeaesestentatsnentaneaneaes 366 76 6 Generate a distributable packagQe ocococcccococcocononancoronanannononnnnoncnnnnnons 367 76 7 Regenerate portable view from Vie W cocococccccconoconconcnnonnannnnnnnnannnnons 367 76 8 Portable view COlAlOO isaac REE a 367 77 MAP SHEETS INSTALLATION ccccccccccccucucusucusucususususususenens 368 78 MAP SHEETS DOCUMENT sais 369 79 DYSCHROMATO PSA 370 EE ATOCIA 370 Zi PUMIC LION OINGY ria rro create 370 2015 gvSIG Page 14 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp lasociaci n 1 INSTALLATION 1 1 Introduction gvSIG Desktop
138. ar You can personalise the expression in the text field The dialogue box controls are only designed to make it easier to edit dimension expressions If you wish you can edit the text field at any time 6 Formats Selecting the format coordinate system and text format 2015 gvSIG Page 62 of 371 NN EET 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n wo Add layer File WMS WCS WFS WMTS GeoDB OSM PostGIS Raster information Layers Styles Dimensions Formats Select formats mage png mage jpeq mage glf mage bmp maqe tif Transparency l EPSG 3785 EPSG 3857 EPSG 4230 EPSG 4258 Server Type WMS 1 1 1 Previous 4 OK Cancel 1 It allows you to choose the image format The main difference between formats is the capacity they have to support transparencies for instance PNG supports transparency JEPG shows transparency areas in an Opaque white 2 It allows you to choose the CRS for the layer It should be similar to the one from the View 3 It allows you to choose the text format for information queries 4 Click on the OK button and the layer will be added to our View WMS can have as a feature an associated legend In this case the legend will be shown in the TOC 11 4 Adding a WMTS The steps to add a WMTS through the Add layer window are 1 Connecting to the service 2015 gvSIG Page 63 of 371 NN A 2 gvSIG asocia
139. arch ares Agreement Coordinates Exact sentence Upper C Any word ULX 1951731 95942 ULY 1 8 174580 78051 C Every word Te BRX 3643177 72679 BRY 3973784 17158 Aspect setup Go to the place Remove old searches Draw result Intelligent search All word forms e Name Write down the name for the search e Agreement Define the search criteria of the input text o Exact sentence 2015 gvSIG Page 168 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide o Any word o Every word e Coordinates To define the coordinates of the searching area By default the coordinates will be the ones referred to the View frame e Restrict search area Clicking it the searching area will be restricted e Aspect setup o Goto the place The searched place name will be the center of the View o Remove old searches Delete all the old searching texts from the View o Draw result Draw one point and one label text in the place of the searching e Results per page To indicate the number of results for each page e Search button To launch the searching process A new window will be opened Comunidad Valenciana Comunidad Valenciana Ibi Museo Valenciano del Juguete de Valencia Comunidad Valenciana Valencia Comunidad Valenciana Valencia Golfo de Valencia Golfo de Valencia Campus de Orihuela Universidad Polit cnica de e Use the buttons Last and Next to move for the r
140. arch by Gazetteer X Delete previous Delete the searches made by Gazetteer searches This button will appear with the first search It shows the following window g Fill the catalog server address E http i A nspire Ccop qva es 30 deegre e fwtfsg a ADL Server Answer wane DEC WFS G Geonames Connect search Close e Fill in the catalog server address Blank space to introduce the URL With Ctrl V is possible to paste a text from the clipboard e Protocols To select the server The available ones are o ADL Protocol specified by Alexandria Digital Library o WFS Protocol for the searching for any place name always in the case of having a text attribute in any of the tables At the same time it allows to make searches using any other field not only with text attributtes 2015 gvSIG Page 167 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n vSIG 2 2 User guide g g o IDEC Protocol for using the Gazetteer service of the Instituto Cartogr fico de Catalu a ICC o WFS G Protocol defined by OGC o Geonames Protocol for using the Geonames web service with a world database o Connect To connect to the server A new window will appear for the search e This window allows to make a criteria search defined by the user It is possible to view the form in a summarised way or make an advanced search clicking the triangle at the top right corner Mame T Restrict se
141. ard has successfully installed gvSIG desktop Click Finish to exit the wizard x View Readme M Launch gvSIG desktop IX Create Desktop Shortcut Then we can start to work with gvSIG Desktop 2015 gvSIG Page 23 of 371 OY a i amp ile Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 2 ADDONS MANAGER 2 1 Interface and behaviour The Addons Manager is a function which allowsus to personalize gvSIG installing new addons functional or otherwise symbols libraries We can execute it from Tools gt Addons Manager It is accesible during the installation progress D install package Select packages I Fast filter Reset filters i Jall T Name Version Type 3D rig amp 3D View 1 0 1 4 plugin y Addon Management w Add ons manager 2 0 100 2164 plugin Chart w Attribute editor 1 0 5 6 plugin Data transforms w Complex Legend extension 1 0 7 14 plugin Database Er CRS basic management Cresques bas 2 0 100 2281 plugin i Development Er CRS basic management Proj4 based 2 0 100 2282 plugin Dyschromatopsia Er Default qvSIG s skin 2 0 100 2159 plugin liFormats is Derived geometries 1 0 8 12 plugin Geo 8 Document Chart 1 0 5 20 plugin 1 Im port e Document Layout document plugin ver 2 0 52 71 plugin lint ation Tr Document Layout document support 2 0 25 39 plugin Labe s Document Table 2 0 100 126 plugin Layout
142. ating the initial and final points which define the line 2015 gvSIG Page 192 of 371 Es gvSIG P gvSIG 2 2 User guide er asociacion This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 First point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting First point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 2 Second point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Second point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 28 5 Insert arch To draw archs indicating the initial and final points which define the arch This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Initial point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Initial point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 2 Second point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Final point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 3 Middle point You can enter it graph
143. ation hydrography road networks administrative boundaries contours etc When you open a View from the project manager a new window composed of the following sections appears Cina selection Layer Show jew ap Toole Wadon tap TT DADA TOCAR eA E a ARGV 9707070 RAB PEO BSE pon O S 1 y Vista Japan E A E EEEE E E E EEEE EE E AE A E A AE A E E E A EEA EA Ee S ME 7 aepoint japon we weweweweeweweewew sw Be eww wwe sew wwe l ws ke l l l l l l D SA a 9 i et PS S 4 A dnpoint japon Se an OF i e p LIARS OV V A rrline_japon i I Gr r DT lt i FA li T gg Di A f of te 4 N 3 gt p rdline_ japon I AF o Pa ay y q di 4 Ss E A da Pia E ja oflina japon p LE E eet 2 j i I I L Pad J o i AOR 3 jl i ae dnnet_ japon i S EA F p eer an Poza r i V Y eRe E ed I I we xls I I s I i q to t E E E E E E E E 1 Menu toolbar 2 Buttons bar 3 Table of contents ToC All the layers containing in the View and the Legend representing the simbology of each layer are listed 4 Locator Displays the current frame in the total work area 5 Visualization area Workspace where the geographical information is displayed and the main work is taken place navigation selection edition etc 6 Status Bar Displays information of the View coordinate system scale coordinates and units The information resulting
144. ayer properties Raster layers have two loading modes Raster image and Elevation mode Raster image loads raster layer at 3D view Elevation mode converts rater layer to DEM Digital Elevation Model taking elevation values from first raster band If Raster image mode is selected raster layer will have the following properties O 2015 gvSIG Page 310 of 371 Euge ee 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n G Poss sys prope ne eee p El Bands Information Transparency En General 3D ns mm 0 O O A m ll Loading mode Raster image I Tile configuration Level of details Minimum O Zero level resolution Elevation Apply Accept Cancel 3D Raster layer properties are divided into five groups 1 Loading mode it indicates what raster layer will be loaded at 3D view 2 Level of details minimum and maximum detail level of layer Minimum level of detail indicates what level the layer will be visible at For example if we indicate two to minimum level layer will be invisible at zero and one detail level Maximum level of detail indicates the maximum level of detail calculated For example if we indicate ten to maximum level of detail plugin only will calculate ten levels of details If we indicate zero as maximum and minimum level 3D Plugin will calculate the best number of detail levels in relation to resolution layer 3 Zero level resolution it indicates the relatio
145. be interpreted by users that have some difficulties related with color vision or dyschromatopsia The Tool Dyschromatopsia adaption extension is installed using the complement manager Administrador de complementos 1 2 Functionality The interface is as follows O Monocromacy Original O Dicramacy LJ a ae I m E E C Deuteranomal Tritanomah O Acromacy kd y f l i Description Perception Normal rel ty 4 1 1 You can select the type of anomaly O 2015 gvSIG Page 370 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n e Monocrom tico Monochrome Lack of two of the primary colors sensitivity e Dicromatico Dichromacy o Protanopia Lack of red color sensitivity o Deuteranopia Lack of green color sensitivity o Tritanopia Lack of blue color sensitivity e Tricromatico an malo Anomalous trichromacy o Protanomaly Anomaly in the red retinal receptors closer to green receptor response affecting discrimination between red and yellow o Deuteranomaly Anomaly in the green retinal receptors that affects softly the discrimination between red and green o Tritanomaly A rare hereditary vision disorder which affects discrimination between blue and yellow e Acromatico Achromatic Lack of color perception 2 It displays depending on the case p
146. between the lines of both layers e Between two polygonar layers the output layer will be another polygonal layer 41 12 Merge This geoprocess can work with many input layers It merges all of these creating a new result layer which has a feature for each feature of all input layers O 2015 gvSIG Page 271 of 371 Tm 2 gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide The interface is Select all layers Selected provincias_andalucia d hidro andalucia ne 10m admin 0 countries Field Merge Polygon Save to temporary file ai Merge Line Save to temporary file r Merge Point Save to temporary file 1 Selection of layers for the merge 2 Field Because each input layer could have its own alphanumeric schema user must select which layer will preserve its schema The rest of input layers will only preserve those attributes whose name and type would be the same that an attribute of the input layer whose schema will be preserved When the geoprocess finishes the new layer will be included in the TOC 41 13 Reproject This geoprocess will change the CRS of the input layer The interface Is 2015 gvSIG Page 272 of 371 l gvSIG y gvSIG 2 2 User guide ita asociacion Input layer provincias andalucia Selected geometries current proj EPSG 4326 Projection of destination EPSG 23030 Reproject Polygon Save to temporary file Reproject Line Save to temporary file Repr
147. buttons allow user to increase the grade inclination and the fourth pair of buttons allows user to increase or decrease vertical exaggeration 3 Status bar it shows the altitude of viewport coordinates of mouse 4 Scale it shows scale of current viewport 5 North indicator it indicates the direction of north and viewport inclination grade 2015 gvSIG Page 303 of 371 Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 54 3D TOOLS 54 1 Spherical 3D view This tool allows users to create a Spherical 3D view from active 2D view To create a Spherical 3D view it is necessary to meet the following requirements e One 2D view active with at least one layer added e Active view projection must be EPSG 4326 e There is not a Spherical 3D view created with the active view There can only be one 3D view with the same type at the same time Due to this there can only be two 3D views spherical and flat associated with the same 2D view at the same time If all requirements are met just do click on menu or bar button and a new Spherical 3D view will be created File Selection Layer Show View Map Tools Window Help Resp provinci IR RARE AEREA RAN NN NN NN NN AAN LAA A SR A TARA AAA gt 1 1 882 224 w Metros Lon 9 17 37 Lat 36 30 57 EPSG 4326 When a new 3D view is created it takes the loaded layers in 2D to transform it into 3D layers to show it at Spherical 3
148. by attributes To select records from one table using an attribute query This tool is available from the Table menu and its relevant button bar The interface Is 6 Select by attributes Table of attributes ne 10m_admin_0 Table filter GEOUNIT y Ae GU_A3 SU DIF BRK NAME NAME LONG BRK_A3 BRK_NAME NAME tanada gvSIG asociaci n e El SUB 50 SU il Is i K i ic 1 Fields Field listing of the layer Double click on the field to be added to the selection query 2 Logical operators To insert clicking on them one logical expression to the query 3 Known values It shows one list with all the different values for the selected field Double click on the value to add to the selection query 4 Query The query to execute will be written It is possible to type it directly 5 Selection options e New set To create a new selection e Add to the set To create a selection taking into account the last query and the sum of the actual query e Select from the set To create a selection of the selected set subtracting from the previous query the actual query O 2015 gvSIG Page 327 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n 61 TABLE EDITION 61 1 Introduction All the tools for modifying the values or structure of one table In the case of attribute tables the edition must begin from the View In the case of alphanumeric tables begins
149. c units 4 Anticline Vertical 2 Anticline Vertical Antiform Vertical 2 Antiform Vertical _ t_ ES EN Asymmetric Anticline Vertical 2 Asymmetric Anticline Vertical Asymmetric Syncline Vertical 2 Asymmetric Syncline Vertical 2015 gvSIG Page 152 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide gvSIG asociaci n 69 Aalenian Aeronian Albian Archean Artinskian Asselian AA AS A A S l Anisian Aptian Aquitanian Barremian Bartonian Bajocian 21 10 gvSIG Basic Basic gvSIG symbol library t x X Airfield Airplane Asterisk 1 Asterisk 2 Asterisk 4 Bolt Check 1 Check 2 Circle 1 Circle 4 Circle 5 A DS ANA es Arrow at End Arterial Street ANZ Contour Topo Index Contour Topo mermbeitis Coastline Collector Street ANS INS Expressway Ramp Expressway APRA load Beige Blue 2 _ Blue Coral Green 2 Green Ery A lade Lake Lilac Lt Orange afp et ey Ma a aes arn EN YE a a qt f 4 fare JE en P P Sik PA PIO vy a Ay eee Ca By Med Blue Med GreenMed Yellow Olive Orange Pattern 1 a 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 Pattern 5 Pattern 6 Pink 21 11 Japanese The symbology used in Japan for the representation of maps It is based on the Japanese Map Symbols of the Geographical Survey Institute dh Bamboo grove Barren land Castle Chimney Broadleaf trees City hall A Car ferry A Coniferous trees
150. ceceseeeeeeeeseeteeeeeseaeeaeeeeaeeaeearsneseeeneaneaneaneags 184 RS A A ooo ie ete ene eiant 185 21 9 SOUL MME IN OMG DOM Pasar ina 185 27 10 Scale GEOMEILY ccc ccecececeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseseeeeaeseeseaeaeseeeeataneanteneaneass 185 27 hls SMP geome y tatasdaneurtianeriawiataaniessaldecasivaenaatapaabinirdseannjnatiierrecaan 186 2015 gvSIG Page 7 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 gvSIG User guide asociacion Z4 AZ NOM CCOMEU A tren PO AI 187 27 13 Insert AUTODOLY GON msm rei 187 2 145 eCG COCA ria ada 187 Z TL EXtend INe TO OD CCl erriren a EA Eea ARATE 187 27 16 Split line with an ODjeCt cocococcccccocononconencnnnconononcnronononancnnononcnnonananes 188 27 Avg MOO 0 WNC O PCCO E E E E A E 188 27 18 Edit verteX esssesersrrrsrrrrrrssrrrrrrerrrsrrrsrrrsrrrnserrrrrreserrrrrrsrrrrrrrerrrrre 189 ZT Ae CODY EO e E E E neeaneeien 189 21 20 Paste gt 100 E OU NA II ia 189 27 21 Delete featureS coccccococcocononononconanancononoranrnronnrnnronnrnnrnnrnarnnnnannanennnnes 190 28 TOOLS FOR INSERTING FEATUREG cccccccneneenenecnenenneuennes 191 ZS La INTO Nro ares 191 28 2 INSEE PONE acrecentar avea 192 A O PO 192 LA e o Cn A E 192 28 5 Insert A rca quer EE e encia ada 193 28 6 Insert circle centre and radiuUs ococcccococonccnonananconenonanconannannarnannnnnanon 193 28 7 Insert circumference centre and TadluUsS occococccccconenonccnonannonnonnnncnnon 193 28 8 Insert circle three pOINtS
151. ci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide 0 Add layer File WMS WES WES WTS GhoDB OSM PostGIS Raster Server n E a tips abank asi p seamiess tilemap basi M L Refresh cache SCapabilities xml Connect Invert the order of the axes Description Name 205730189 4 Le Ate RE WMTS EEM 11 200 000 covering the entire Japanese Archipelago This was accomplished by harmoni gional geological maps that were seer gin various ages We have rslon of the 1 200 000 seamless geologica maps such as basic versio d detailed version based on the number of l legend The basic version of the map Is based on the legend of 195 while the number of the legend of the detailed one is 397 In this WMTS the geographic coordinates are based on geodetic reference system also i known as the Japanese Geodetic Datum 2000 UGD2000 J GD2000 is based on the GRS8 ellipsoid that was defined by IUGG l Cancel 1 Select the WMTS tab 2 Introduce the URL server The URL will be stored and it will be shown in the drop down box for other occasions 3 Click on the Connect button 4 When the connection is made a welcome message from the server appears not always 5 The information about the type of server with which the connection has been made to is shown at the bottom of the box 6 When the connection is made the Next button is enabled Click on it to start with
152. console command or with the context menu by selecting Insert point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 2 Between one point and the other one it s possible to indicate if the join will be with a line or an arch from the console command or with the context menu selecting Arch mode or Line mode 3 Finish polyline There are two options e Finish To finish the polyline from the console command or from the context menu selecting Finish e Close polyline To close the polyline by joining the last vertex and the first one from the console command or from the context menu selecting Close polyline 28 14 Insert filled regular polygon To draw filled polygons indicating the number of sides if it is Inscribed or circumscribed and the center of the polygon The full regular polygon is a polygonal feature This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Sides Number of sides for defining the polygon You can enter them using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Sides 2 Inscribed or circumscribed It allows to indicate if the polygon is inscribed or circumscribed to the circumference which defines it from the console command or with the context menu selecting nscribed or Circumscribed 3 Centre You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the
153. contains the option Number of Classes where you can set the number of intervals in which the histogram is divided when the data type of the image is not Byte For Byte images this value is 256 In the preferences dialog the default value of this option is 64 The intervals are the parts in which the range of values is divided For example if we have a DTM with values between O and 1 and there are 64 intervals each interval will have a range of 1 64 The number of classes does not only refer to histograms but also to other functionalities that require a division in intervals of value ranges 34 3 Colour table It allows users to assign specific RGB values to a range of pixel values in a single band image We can apply existing color tables or create new ones It is available from the Layer menu from the contextual menu of layer in the TOC and from the buttons bar of raster layer To use this function it is important to know the minimum and maximum values in the image If these values are unknown they will have to be calculated Depending on the size of the image this calculation process may take some time The interface is the following one Preview O 214 649 425 233 0 58 649 429 784897253 0 68 784 857 920 286 255 6 78 920 286 1 0553 7 233 14 16 108 1 035 1 123 4 Maa l7 17 128 l 123 1 191 1 M3 13 la 133 1 191 1 258 8 a 13 15 168 1 258 1 326 3 a 0 0 219 1 326
154. coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Centre that opens a window for entering the coordinates 2 Radius You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Radius point that opens a window for entering the coordinates or Radius value that opens a window for entering the value 28 8 Insert circle three points To draw circles indicating three points which define the circle The circle is a linear feature This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 First point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting First point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 2 Second point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Second point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 3 Third point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Third point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 28 9 Insert circumference three points
155. cted layer in TOC and click Zoom to layer in the contextual menu Zoom to raster Zoom to a screen pixel with the same pixel resolution size of the raster layer Right click on the selected layer in TOC and click Zoom to raster resolution in the contextual menu Clickingf on the visible area and it will center the View on this point Scrolling the mouse is possible to zoom in and zoom out In this case the enlargement will use as focus the View center With the mouse wheel pressed and moving it the frame order will be executed In the status bar is possible to indicate the View scale writing the scale factor or selecting any of the available in the drop down menu 23 2 Zoom Manager It is possible to save a zoom and go back to it at any time This tool is available in the View Navigation Frame Manager and in the specific tool bar The interface is 2015 gvSIG Page 163 of 371 C gvSIG 2 2 User guide E9 gvSIG lasociaci n E F r Save current zoom Name for the zoom Recover and delete other zoom Select Delete e Name for the zoom It allows to give a name to the actual zoom of the View e Save button The zoom currently in the View will be added to the Zoom Manager text box with the given name and with the rest of available zooms e Recover and delete other zooms Available zooms list e Select button Selecting one zoom from the list the View w
156. d ons to add or improve the available ey5IG functionalities Those add ons installation will be able to be made from three different sources Standard installation select this option if the downloaded gvSIG installable file contains add ons to install Installation from file if you have also downloaded installation add ons or add on sets files with extension evepke or evepkes Installation From URL select this option if you are connected to Internet The list of all currently available gvSIG add on will be downloaded from the Link which appears in this option 4 Click Hext to open the gvSIG add ons installer Back Ji Next gt i Cancel Is not necessary that we install any plug in at this time The Add ons manager is always available in the gvSIG repository and we can have access to it at any time in Tools Add ons Manager menu Click on Next and a new dialog window appears to select the add ons installation source Select one and click on Next 2015 gvSIG Page 20 of 371 a OO lll 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide l sociaci n o gvSIG packages installer Select installation source 2 Standard installation install addons contained in the gvSIG standard distribution O Installation from file install addons contained in a quspki or gvspks file O Installation from URL install addons from a remote repository Next gt Cancel The next dialog window shows us two opt
157. dS Streets Streets2 Streets3 Waterl Water2 Waters 21 18 Weather Symbology for climate mapping according to the standard World Meteorological Organization in the document WMO No 485 Manual on the Global Data Processing and Forecasting System Manual the work done by the group MetOceanDWG of OGC related to the symbology to represent the Climatology NS 2 5 bREASayvoy wlwl 04 wlwl 06 wlwl 07 wlwl 08 wlwl 09 wiwl 10 wiwl 11 ww 19 wlwl 20 wlwl 21 wlwl 22 wlwl 23 wlwl 24 Y a Sg t To o xkdldls Wlwl 25 wlwl 26 wlwl 27 wiwl 28 wiwl 30 wwl 39 wlwl 41 wlwl 42 wlwl 43 wlwl 44 wlwl 45 wlwl 46 wlwl 47 TOL TOZ T03 104 TOS TOG TO TOS TOS T10 T11 112 T13 T14 T15 T16 TL T18 T19 T20 T21 O 2015 gvSIG Page 157 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide 22 CREATE SYMBOL LIBRARIES 22 1 Import picture marker symbols With the Import picture marker symbols tool the user can create new symbol libraries from image files png svg or add these marker symbols to libraries already installed This tool is located in Tools Symbols Import picture marker symbols E Addons manager Symbology Browse symbols Import picture marker symbols scripting Attribute editor Create symbology package mn Develanment The interface is J Import picture marker sy oA xl Import images as picture marker symbals Images to import Ca
158. da en la salida r ster sera aplicada a todas las operaciones Si se quiere usar una configuraci n diferente de salida raster entonces se debe definir un proceso por lotes diferente Con la tabla ya definida s lo resta hacer clic sobre el bot n Aceptar para lanzar la ejecuci n de los procesos Al t rmino de la ejecuci n se muestra un resumen textual de todos los procesos desarrollados indicando los valores que se han empleado en cada uno de ellos o informando de posibles errores Las nuevas capas creadas se guardan en el directorio que por defecto se ha establecido anteriormente Existe una forma adicional de ejecutar un proceso por lotes en este caso empleando capas que ya est n abiertas en gvSIG las mismas que podr as utilizar para ejecutar un geoproceso de forma individual Se ejecuta pulsando con el bot n derecho del rat n sobre el nombre del geoproceso y seleccionando en el men contetual Ejecutar como proceso por lotes con capas cargadas La ventana que aparece se asemeja a la del proceso por lotes con la diferencia de que las capas de entrada no se eligen como ficheros sino seleccionando los nombres de capas que ya estuvieran abiertas previamente 2015 gvSIG Page 298 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG lasociaci n 50 HISTORY 50 1 Introduction Every time you execute a geoprocess of the toolbox information about the process is stored in the history manager Along with the parameters used the
159. date and time of the execution are also saved This way it is easy to track the and control all the work that has been developed and easily reproduce it It is available from Tools Geoprocessing History The history manager is a set of registries grouped according to their date of execution making it easier to find information about an algorithm executed at any particular moment Process information is kept as a command line expression even if the algorithm was launched from the toolbox This makes it also useful for those learning how to use the command line interface since they can call an algorithm using the toolbox and then check the history manager to see how that same algorithm could be called from the command line Apart from browsing the entries in the registry processes can be re executed simply double clicking on the corresponding entry You can also right click on a process the command line sentence must start with runalg and select Open algorithm dialogue This will show the dialogue used to execute the algorithm already filled with the parameter values corresponding to the selected command 2015 gvSIG Page 299 of 371 C gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide Es 51 CATALOG O 2015 gvSIG Page 300 of 371 A a gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide 52 WEB MAP CONTEXT WMC 2015 gvSIG Page 301 of 371 2 AA gvSIG 2 2 User guide 53 3D PLUGIN 53 1 Introduc
160. default when you create a new project the View document is active View View Document list Displays the list of existing documents on the selected document type If for example the View document is selected all views created in the project appears If no element is created the box stay blank Toolbar It contains tools to create open rename delete and access the properties of each type of document Quick access to project manager using the Show Project manager menu or the hotkey Alt P gvSIG shows the project manager in the foreground Copy Paste documents in the area of the list of documents taking one of the listed documents selected with the right button we will show a context menu that lets you cut copy and paste documents 2015 gvSIG Page 33 of 371 NN TET gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide 7 PREFERENCES 7 1 Introduction In Preferences window you can set certain preferences in gvSIG configuration These preferences apply to all sessions of gvSIG To open the Preferences dialog you can use the Display Settings menu or the corresponding button Menu Button Project manager Alt P Console Alt S A Settings This dialog box includes several sections organized in a tree Each section corresponds to specific settings o Preferences ct Fj A No Symbols isc Appearance i Extensions Default color i Folde
161. dex for the package Index location i desktop qvslG desktop 2 2 O install qvSlG desktop 2 2 0 symbols new 1 0 1 1 final all all j1_5 qvspki The index needs the url where the package will be located e Package file It is the folder where the generated package will be saved in By default packages are saved in the gvSIG install folder inside a folder called install usually with a default name and with gvspkg extension e In the case of we want to share the package from an URL we need to take into account Creating the package index We will only check this option if we want to share the package The package index is a GVSPKI file which is useful to install it on line from gvSIG No need to check it in any other case Download URL The server address where the package is available has to be indicated server package name 2015 gvSIG Page 161 of 371 A as gvSIG 2 2 User guide 23 NAVIGATION TOOLS 23 1 Introduction 9 gvsic asociaci n The navigation tools are those that allow navigation within the View data and basically make changes to the display scale zoom and movements pan These tools are available from the View Navigation menu and in its own button bar Menu Toolbar ow Map Tools Window Help C pa LEN a a 3 e gE Set all layers to gt S S vOS Navigation i Font l l Cai New layer y Zoom into center Add layer Alt O Zoom out from center S Add
162. ds are versions of the image with lower resolution which allow the rapid load of very big images in a general zoom the lower resolution image is displayed while when you zoom in the more resolution image is loaded It is available from the Layer menu from the layer contextual menu and from the raster toolbar The Raster section of the Preferences in gvSIG contains the options that allow to generate overviews overviews number ratio and algorithm 34 7 Analysis view It is a tool for a quick inspection It has two effects It loads the same image in the TOC and it opens a new window where a detail Zoom appears and where we can see the image s values in real time It is available from the raster toolbar With this functionality you can zoom in on the current layer with three different zoom levels 2015 gvSIG Page 222 of 371 OO lhl avSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide a ai asociacion e Level 1 General view of the layer The layer is added to the locator map e Level 2 Visualization area of the View e Level 3 Floating window with the highest zoom level The zoom level is fixed and always centered on the mouse point By moving the mouse over the gvSIG view you will see contents change Also it shows a text at the bottom right of the window showing the RGB values of the pixel on which the cursor is currently located When right clicking on the floating window a contextual menu appears It al
163. e Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n Upload resource Default output folder AA Advanced options WebDAV Paths Connection configuration Folder Connect Cancel Accep e Advanced options o WebDAV This process of publishing the project generated on the server can be done automatically at the time the project is created or can be upload after with another tool extension In the first case automatically you need to indicate the destination address to establish the WebDAV connection If it is a directory authentication you must also provide the username and password o Connect It will check that connection and also it will fill the left menu with the subfolders that exist in the specified path o Paths Paths by default O Absolute paths CO Relative path o For a correct operation of services it is necessary that the access to resources are properly defined To do this there are three possibilities to define the routes to them 2015 gvSIG Page 357 of 371 ND i gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n Default paths This option does not alter the paths to resources setting them such in the definition files of the different services Absolute paths adequate if there is a correspondence between the location of the files on both machines eg the shapes are inside a folder called data and have identical directory structure
164. e Change data type It allows to change the data type of the image asi Export view to It allows to export the View as a non image georreferenced image The buttons bar of the raster tools has three components gf 5 NEL_HR_LC e Main button bar Drop down button which allows to select the secondary button bar to work with it e Secondary button bar It varies depending on the selection in the main button It shows a group of raster tools e Current raster layer Drop down button which allows to select the raster layer you want to work with You can search filter between the available layers The interface of the tools varies if you access from the geoprocessing toolbox 2015 gvSIG Page 212 of 371 A 9 gvsic gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n 34 RASTER LAYER 34 1 Select raster layer It allows users to enable a raster layer by clicking on it in the working area It is necessary that the raster layer is visible It is available from the buttons bar of the raster layer As a result the layer will be automatically enabled in the TOC and its name will appear in the drop down list of the toolbar 34 2 Histogram It allows to consult and modify the raster histogram It is available from the Layer menu the contextual menu of the layer in the TOC and the buttons bar of the raster layer The interface is the following one OG Histogram 222 28 ee ee ee Source visualize data Sho
165. e 64 INTERFAZ DEL MAPA 2015 gvSIG Page 335 of 371 Se a gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide 65 ELEMENTOS CARTOGR FICOS 2015 gvSIG Page 336 of 371 E A gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide 66 ELEMENTOS GR FICOS 2015 gvSIG Page 337 of 371 a a gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide 67 HERRAMIENTAS DE NAVEGACI N 2015 gvSIG Page 338 of 371 tO LS EEE gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide 68 HERRAMIENTAS DE DISE O 2015 gvSIG Page 339 of 371 EEE gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 HERRAMIENTAS DE EDICI N 2015 gvSIG Page 340 of 371 E gvSIG C gvSIG 2 2 User guide 70 HERRAMIENTAS DE EXPORTACI N E IMPRESION 2015 gvSIG Page 341 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide 71 PLANTILLAS DE MAPA 2015 gvSIG Page 342 of 371 C O gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide ai asociaci n C 72 DOCUMENT CHARTS 72 1 Introduction The Charts are the gvSIG documents for definying one or more plots One Chart Document can have a determined number of plots It is possible to create a chart from the attribute table of one layer or from an alphanumeric Table Supported charts by gvSIG Type Icon Description Pie The pie chart or circle chart is one circle divided into two or more sections The pie charts show relations between the par
166. e org data atlas If you have questions comments or suqgestions please contact NSIDC User Services at 1 303 492 6199 or nsidc nsidc org The development of this map server tole lal was alli c di NASA s Earth Observing atoll The National Snow and ite Data Center NSIDC Atlas of the C A A A Pr pee pe pe a ee ee pee 2 We ah A e ah TH Th ns ut aM MAA AA AAA A A AAA MA SS SS ESS ESS ESS ESS OS A A A O A WES y version 0 1 0 0 re 5 none Features cac 1 Select the WFS tab 2 Introduce the URL server The URL will be stored and it will be shown in the drop down box for other occasions 3 Click on Connect 4 When the connection is made a welcome message from the server appears not always 5 The information about the type of server with which the connection has been made to is shown at the bottom of the box 6 When the connection is made the Next button is enabled Click on it to start with the configuration of the WFS layer You can select the Refresh cache option which will search for information from the server in the local host This will only work if the same server was used on a previous occasion 2 Information It shows the server information 2015 gvS
167. e 151 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp lasociaci n AA O At risk Control area Dangerous Free area Infected Negative Not assessed Other area Quarantine area Resolved 21 8 G Maps This symbol library is based on the symbols of Nicolas Mollet called Map Icons Collection and is for Google Maps When using point symbols you have to remember that by default no y offset is applied thus if you want that the symbol will be over the geometrical point symbol properties have to be edited adding a y offset with a value equal to the half of symbol size in our case since the symbol has a default size of 32 an offset of 16 will be used 3 p E reres i Aboriginal Airshow Anniversary Anthropo Aquarium Q t 5 Art museum Billiard Bowling Bullfight Bustour fa be i J N N L F p 1 g 1 a A g Ferry HighwayStreetl Street Streets Waterl Water Building Greenspace Non urban Urban 2 Urban Water 21 9 Geology This symbol library is based on the Digital Cartographic Standard for Geologic Map Symbolization guide of the FGDC Federal Geographic Data Committee The symbols are classified in folders and subfolders bedding cleavage eolian pluvial alluvial foliation geohydrology The set of filled designed from the RGB colour codes defined by the CGMW Commission for the Geological Map of the World represent the different stratigraphi
168. e as model e Colour Dropdown to select the colour for the canvas 47 3 Definition of the workflow Once the inputs have been defined it is time to define the algorithms to apply on them Algorithms can be found in the Processes tab grouped much in the same way as they are in the toolbox 2015 gvSIG Page 285 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n Algorithms gt g gvSIG Geoprocesses ni Multispectral raster H Raster layers 6 Wector layers tools 2 SEXTANTE 3D za Basic hydrological analy Basic tools for raster la Buffers Calculus tools for raster Cost distances and rout Development Fire modeling Focal statistics Fuzzy logic H Geomorphometry and te H Geosocial H Geostatistics mae processing Inputs a To add a process double click on its name An execution dialogue will appear with a content similar to the one found execution panel that SEXTANTE shows when executing the algorithm from the toolbox O 2015 gvSIG Page 286 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide Add algorithm Slope gvSIG lasociaci n Description Slopel Raster layers Elevation Options Method Units Output objects Slope raster Raster layer 1 Maximum slope Travis et al 1975 RRadians Save as ii Lamis Some differences exist however the main one being the absence of a raster output tab even if the selected algorithm generates raster layers
169. e connection a e Establish connection o Select the tab DB o Click the button to create a new connection If there are existing connections we just need to select them from dropdown When created a new connection it s opened this tab Connection parameters Connection name qvsig Driver PostgresQlexplorer ss Host gwsig tralning com Port 5432 Database andalucia User admin Password Note that the user name and password must match case sensitive with that recorded in the data base Advanced Delete OK Cancel o We indicate connection parameters 1 Connection name user s choice 2015 gvSIG Page 317 of 371 AAA gvSIG 2 2 User guide 9 gvsic asociaci n 2 Connector We select from the dropdown database type that we want to connect MySQL PostgreSQL JDBC 3 Server URL from server 4 Port 5 Database database name 6 User 7 Password o Click OK and the connection will be established When established the tab New table DB show the available ones Choose connection gvsig Choose table public spatial_ ref sys public tr relieve andalucia public tr relieve andalucia2 eS C public ts comunicaciones andall public ts ferrocarrilAndal public ts muni_andalucia public ts municipiosAndal 9 Table fields gid Integer fnode_ Integer tnode Integer Ipoly Integer rpoly_ Integer length Double uo
170. e each file represents a band At the bottom you can select the display order By default the display order is assigned by the colour interpretation of the bands if this information is available From the display selector we can change this display order marking the band we want to be displayed in red R green G blue B or alpha A If we click on Save the interpretation of colour we have at the moment in the picture will be saved This means that the next time we open it with gvSIG the bands will be displayed in that order 19 4 Transparency It provides tools to change the transparency levels that can be applied to a raster coverage The interface Is 2015 gvSIG Page 135 of 371 A llc COC eee 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n Opacity Activate Transparency by pixel Activate F a ols 0560650 i OSITO CA M A AA 4 Remove On one hand there is the Opacity option which indicates a opacity percentage A Smaller percentage of opacity a greater transparency percentage If is enabled it is possible to indicate the degree of opacity by numbers or by the slider On the other hand there is the Transparency by pixel option which allows to the RGB colour groups to be completely transparent This is useful for example to remove the wedges in the ortophotos or satellite scenes or for deleting the edges between the images of one mosaic We must add t
171. e principal components It allows to select three kind of Statistics by band matrix variance covariance and eigenvector If there are no selected bands it is reported and nothing is done The result of the statistic calculation is shown In a new window G Statistics 222222222 Ss Informe estadistico de Componentes Principales Estadisticas de bandas band 1 band 2 band 3 band 4 band 5 band 6 127 00000 127 00000 127 00000 127 00000 127 00000 127 00000 128 00000 128 00000 128 00000 128 00000 128 00000 128 00000 Mean 90 20579 42 22948 46 47538 81 05749 106 43204 50 52408 Variance 820 84456 212 12043 343 71577 751 27979 1556 23117 437 07519 Standard deviation 28 65038 1456435 18 53957 27 40948 39 44910 20 90634 Save Close The result of the transformation generates a double type image with the same number of bands as the components choosen in the second dialog box 2015 gvSIG Page 225 of 371 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide L asociaci n 35 2 Tasseled cap The tasseled cap transformation is a more general transformation than the one of the principal components providing indexes with certain physical significance so that it is possible to determine the brightness value the greenness and the soil moisture The tasseled cap transformation focuses on highlighting the relevant spectral features of the plant surfaces during their development in orde
172. e roww with duplicate values of the selected field It shows statistics of the selected field Page 320 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide 59 2 Join It allows to see the join between two Tables The join allows one to one or many to one relations To make the join both tables must have a common field which it will be the joining point the field name doesn t need to be the same but yes the data type This tool is available from the Table menu Tools Transforms Create or its relevant button bar The interface gives the steps to make the join 5 O Apply a transform Select a data store 1 Select a data store The Table where the fields of the second table will be joined must be selected Click on Next Select the second data store aepoint dnpoint hsline ofline rrline testl test tests 2 Select the second data store The Table which has the new fields to be joined to the first Table must be selected Click on Next 2015 gvSIG Page 321 of 371 ie A gvSIG 2 2 User guide gvSIG asociaci n Select the transformation parameters Select the key of the first table id 0 Apply a transform Select the key of the second table id Type a prefix for the first table 1 Type a prefix for the second table 2 Select the attributes to join id color valor 3 Select the transformation par
173. e table from the top pannel to the bottom panel e The move up and Move down buttons allow users to move the element in the bottom panel In order to do so the element must be selected in that panel Create It starts the process of creating a new polygonal or linear element from the punctual elements in the bottom panel and in the order they appear in it 2015 gvSIG Page 207 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 9 gvsic asociaci n 33 RASTER TOOLS 33 1 Introduction Raster tools allow users to analyze to create and to process raster data These tools are available from the dropdown buttons bar of raster tools Some of these tools are available in the Tool Box of geoprocessing Some raster tools are also available in the contextual menu of raster layer which appears by right clicking on the layer on the TOC and in the menu Layer The tool Information by point is also available as a button Main buttons bar Secondary buttons bar 3 Raster layer Raster layer BS Raster dataset A Multispectral raster EE Select raster layers Enhanced ja Histogram 5 Geographic transformations Y r Fy Raster properties Export to raster Ey p o lt gt Area of interest da Generate overviews Pl Analysis View Raster dataset Create layer multifile Multispectral raster ES Principal Components a Tasseled Cap Enhancement Y RGB Filters Radiometric enhanced
174. e the chart e Renderer typesr To select the type of the plot e Drawing options To select the different options for reperesenting the selected chart dimension orientation Once all has been set up click on Next 2015 gvSIG Page 345 of 371 ta rrr 2 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n Adda new variable Chart type Data origin Chart format Choose the data origin Table Table of attributes Provincias andalucia Chart data definition Labels PROVINCIA Numeric values HABITANTES Use only selected rows Null data policy Ignore null values 2 Group null values in a category Series name 2 Data origin It sets the relation between the data and the axis of the plot e Table To select the table as the data origin e Agrupados por Optional To classified the data in groups by one field e X To select the X field Clicking on Sort axis alphanumerically the values will be sorted alphanumerically e Y To select the Y field e Use only selected rows Only the selected values of the Table will be used e Null data policy It is possible to ignore or group the null values in a category e Symbol To define the colour of the legend Click on Next O 2015 gvSIG Page 346 of 371 C gvSIG asociacion gvSIG 2 2 User guide C Chart type Data origin Chart format 1 Plot Plot Value labels a sond CS y Ebo _ mor Outline
175. e the name of the new layer we want to create and the path where it will be saved The type of the output layer is automatically selected based on the type of process we indicate e Options Type of process It allows users to choose between to convert from points to polygons or from points to lines Once we define the different options we must click Next button to start the operation to create the elements 2015 gvSIG Page 206 of 371 EO eee 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp lasociaci n 6 Derived geometries o aff Be Be Layers Source layer Output layer Features 1 000 0 1 000 0 1 000 0 1 033 3 100 000 BASE 100 030 BASE 1 000 7 1 020 2 999 360 1 030 3 98 650 1 037 8 991 450 1 036 3 100 0306 100 050 B 100 110 B 100 040 B new features 990 8499 993 499 996 5399 1002 729 1001 830 1001 390 998 1199 997 9699 11003 590 100 0500 B 100 0 E 399 950003 B 1100 0299 B 1011 030 100 0400 B Generate Finish e Objects It shows the attribute table of the source layer It allows you to select elements in it The elements selection will be used to indicate which points form a geometry e 4 and buttons on the left add all elements from the attribute table from the top pannel to the bottom panel e and buttons on the right add the selected elements in the attribut
176. e tool the tool will be applied on these To end the selection press Enter 2 Select each line to split When the mouse is over the line a result preview is shown at the time the lines are being selected they will be extended until the selected objects in the previous step 3 Once all the lines have been extended press Esc to close the function 27 17 Smooth line To smooth angles in one line This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To end the selection press Enter 2 Intermediate steps 1 9 3 Smooth method There are three methods available natural cubic splines B zier curves B splines 2015 gvSIG Page 188 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG lasociaci n 27 18 Edit vertex To edit the vertex of one geometry move delete and add This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To end the selection press Enter The vertex of the geometry will be shown 2 Select one vertex You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the c
177. e values are removed and only values matching those left inside will be applied The effect created is to have displaced the maximum and minimum 2015 gvSIG Page 137 of 371 gvSIG asociacion C 20 EDITION AND SYMBOL MANAGEMENT 20 1 Symbol browser gvSIG 2 2 User guide From Tools Symbols Browse Symbols menu WE Addons manager Symbology Browse symbols Import picture marker symbols scripting Create symbology package Attribute editar Development Transforms Geoprocessing It allows to explore the different symbols in the program and they are classified in three tabs e Marker Point symbols for layers containing point geometries e Line Linear symbols for layers containing linear geometries e Fill Fill symbols for layers containing polygonal geometries The interface is similar to the Symbology selector window which appears when we want to change any symbol of the legend In this last case it will not appear the three tabs only the relevant for the layer type The Symbol browser allows to explore the available symbols and through the Symbol property Editor to create new symbols or modify the existent ones The interface Is O 2015 gvSIG Page 138 of 371 EE eee gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG lasociaci n 60 oa e aj A Marker symbols Symbol library gvSIG Basic 6 Save Reset Properti
178. each position Displays a much more balanced histogram without excessive peaks hiding the rest Cumulative logarithmic It shows the logarithmic histogram but at each position it accumulates the previous values 2 Preview Displays in real time the result of the changes to be implemented The options on the lower part allow to select the result only on visualization or on a new layer 36 3 Mask by region of interest It allows apply a mask of enhancement by region of interest 2015 gvSIG Page 236 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide ai asociaci n C Available from the enhancement button bar and in the geoprocessing toolbox The interface is as follows g ee fe cc EERE ROI 1447419107631 Inverse Value 99 999 Create output layer O Create file 2 Open in memory ROIs List of regions of interest e Inverse If it is activated apply mask to areas outside the regions of interest and the interior remains totally opaque e Value Select the mask value e Preview Allows to visualize in real time the result of the changes to be implemented The options on the lower part allow to select the result only on visualization or on a new layer 2015 gvSIG Page 237 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n f 37 GEOGRAPHIC TRANSFORMATIONS 37 1 Reproject layer Allows to generate a raster reprojection Available from the Layer menu geographical t
179. eased this way by its authors You can apply it to your programs too Mhen we speak of free software we are referring to Freedom not price Dur General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of Free software Cand charge for them if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you g META y it that ois ean chance tha snt nara nr dra Hiaras oo it in FAL rs I accept the terms of the license agreement I do not accept the terms of the license agreement Step 3 Select the Java Virtual Machine gvSIG requires a Java Virtual Machine to work We must select e Select Java installation found in the system at e Select another Java installation to use e Install a new Java Runtime Environment available by default in the installation The only precaution that we must have is that if we are setting up a 32 bits gvSIG we need a 32 bits Java Virtual Machine If it is a 64 bits gvSIG we need a 64 bits Java Virtual Machine By default the Java Virtual Machine of a 64 bits Linux will be 64 bits and the Java Virtual Machine of a 32 bits Linux it will be 32 bits so the first option should not cause problems When we are in doubt we recommend to select the third option in this case gvSIG uses the Java Vitual machine installed by itself to ensure compatibility After selecting the option click on Next 2015 gvSIG Page 17 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2
180. eet elevation and accumulation and more In order to support polar proj Atlas is divided into two separate map servers one for the Northern Hemigs for the Southern Hemisphere In addition to providing map images and so through Open Geospatial Consortium Inc OGC protocols WMS WFS als dynamic web interface for exploring these data is also available at ee http nside org data atlas Ifyou have questions comments or suggestion contact NSIDC User Services at 1 303 492 6199 or nsidc ansidc org The ofthis map server application was supported by NASA s Earth Observing Program under contract MAS5 03099 and was developed using MapSserve source development environment for building spatially enabled internet ap cite the Atlas ofthe Cryosphere Maurer J 2007 Atlas ofthe Cryosphere Colorado USA National Snow and Ice Data Center Digital media Availabl http vinside org data atla ss Server Type WES 1 0 0 Previous Next 1 Click on Next 3 It allows users to access to the set of available layers in the WCS server and to choose the one you want to add to the View 2015 gvSIG Page 73 of 371 q Te gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n C Information Coverage 1 Format Time Parameters Coverage s name Greenland surface elevation Select Coverages snow extent September 1967 2004 al snow extent August 1967 2004 snow extent July 1967 2004 isnow extent June 196
181. efinites When the geoprocess finishes the new layer will be included in the TOC 41 3 Lateral buffer Creates a buffer in one of the sides of the feature left or right The interface is Input provincias_andalucia Options Area defined by a distance in meters COUNT T O Area defined by a distance in meters Selected geometries Dissolve entities Select lateral Left Number of concentrical rings 1 7 Outputs Lateral buffer vectorial Save to temporary file aid 1 Input To select the input layer from a dropdown menu 2015 gvSIG Page 264 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG L asociaci n 2 There are two options to define the area e Area defined by a field in meters it is possible to select a field of the input layer from which the buffer s radius will be taken e Area defined by a distance in meters it is possible to enter the numeric value of the buffer s radius 3 Selected geometries Option to use only the selected features 4 Dissolve entities only one ring It is possible to fuse the features of the buffer in contact 5 Select lateral To select the lateral to which the buffer will be made left or right 6 To set the number of buffers or equidistant rings around the input geometries If the input information is correct when executing the geoprocess a dialogue screen will Show the progress telling us the status in the lateral buffer calculation
182. efinition ir image settings Tile format Height 256 wain ES SG o MapProxy Options of the MapProxy service Cache directory 73 3 Manual edition of specific attributes Sometimes it can be interesting to define the parameters more precisely and adjust the specifications to the ones that Mapserver offers For that reason some mechanisms have been created to be able to complete these characteristics through some forms There are two access points e View Properties which will define the characteristics of the Mapfile service MapFile section In this window there are 4 tabs Mapserver TinyOWS MapCache MapProxy 2015 gvSIG Page 354 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide gvSIG asociaci n MapServer TinyOWS C Activate panel MapServer Options Name mea Web A ows_enable_req wms_title Mapfile wms_abstract Powered by Metadata BrowserFormat QueryFormat LegendFormat Empty Error C Activate panel Tinyows OnlineResource SchemaDir Log LogLevel DegreePrecision MeterPrecision DisplayBBox EstimatedExtent CheckSchema CheckValidGeom Encoding ExposePk MapCache MapProxy C Activate panel MapCache Reload form AAA defaultFormat PNG FAST a autoReload a Caches ie DI Base SymlinkBlank v C Activate panel Service Services idl tl gt i 0 0 t
183. el s text Default Ann tion Choose the field used to store the labelgs color Default Choose the field used to store the labelgs height London Default in units Choose the field used to store the labeljs font Paris Default 2 It allows us to select fields where the different annotations properties will be stored Once this is set click on the Next button 3 Select file First we must select the name and file location of the new layer Once this is set click on the Comenzar button Select file Export progress annotation 276 276 Insert layer v Would you like to add this new layer to the active view 4 The export process is performed and a new window allows us to select if we want to add the annotation layer in the View 2015 gvSIG Page 94 of 371 O a gvSIG C gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 13SUPPORTED FORMATS 13 1 File Informative table of the file formats supported by gvSIG Format Extension Read Write Notes DBF dbf Yes Yes CSV CSV Yes Yes MsEXCEL xls Yes No Shapefile shp Yes Yes GML gml Yes No KML kml Yes No DXF Drawing dxf Yes Yes Exchange Format DWG Drawing dwg Yes No Supported versions 12 13 14 15 2004 DGN Design dgn Yes No Supported versions 8 NetCDF NC Yes No Vectorial and raster Network Common Data COf Form
184. elete filter expression The interface contains New filtered expression The Expression creator window opens where you can configure expressions filters for applying onespecific symbol Each of those filters will be shown as a row in the main window of this legend type The syntax used by these filters is SLD O 2015 gvSIG Page 109 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide sr asociacion 0 Expression creator Available fields Available functions and operators a Double click on field Al operator or function O Numeric name to paste it into Stri text box e _ Date time O Logical Geometry User expression POP_EST gt 10000000 Clear Symbol and description SS o OK Cancel e Modify filter expression To modify an expression by selecting it e Delete filter expression To delete an expression by selecting it e Up Down To move the created expressions up or down as we wanted to have them in the TOC e Other values If this is enabled all the values without a symbol for its value will be represented with a specific symbol If it s not active those elements will not be Shown If this is enabled all the values 17 5 Quantities Dot density To show the quantity of one attribute in one area as a dot density map Each dot will be a specific number of element for instance in a layer of the world countries one dot can be a population of 1 000 000 The dots will be distribu
185. emory Mame of the layer NewLayer_1 Use regions of interest of the layer Accept Cancel e Bands It allows users to select bands which will become part of the transformation e Output options The result of the operation can be loaded in the temporary layer Open in memory or in the file you specify Create file e Name of the layer Name of the resulting raster e Use regions of interest of the layer It allows to use ROIs e Accept Launches the calculation of principal components When the process is finished the second dialog box appears 2015 gvSIG Page 224 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 9 gvsic asociaci n U Principal Components e e Component selection E Eigenvalue w 0 16591 3862641 597 0 8439266 1916192 1 2691 0241051392816 0 12533273804669 2 1329 8149101356244 0 062868215f01322 A E 468 02192469386862 0 022126 2043232 g 4 7 3333934026715 0 00366556107771 OE 34 141211044300654 0 00161409753011 Statistics By band O Matrix variance covariance Generate CO Eigenvector Accept Cancel e Component selection It shows the resulting components of the calculation with the percentage of information that each of them provides to the original raster It allows to select which of these components will become part of the output raster e Statistics Clicking on Generate launches the calculation of the necessary Statistics to extract th
186. er the ruler and move it to the right Then click over the ruler section wanted and a black section will appear which can be deleted if clicks again in a new section This way new sections to define the line can be added The black sections are the filled sections and the white ones will be transparent To delete the created line press Clear Arrow decorator allows to use the decorate the arrows of the lines enabling Use decorator Use decorator Size 10 E Arrow sharpness 30 E Mumber of positions 2 Choose symbol Flip Rotation Flip all Rotate symbol to follow line angle Flip first 2 Keep symbol at fixed angle to page The options are e Arrow size e Arrow sharpness Number of positions Number of times that the arrow is repeated in one line e Choose symbol It opens the Symbol selector window for markers It allows to select the arrow shape and set it up as a dot symbol e Flip To flip just one arrow or all the arrows e Rotation Rotate symbol to follow line angle or keep symbol at fixed angle to page 20 5 Editor Picture line symbol Selecting Picture line symbol the interface is Picture file Browse Selection picture file Width 18 0000 Scale X 1 E Scale Y l E 2015 gvSIG Page 144 of 371 q 0 Te E gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n It is possible to select the image that we want to be part of the line This image has to be jog
187. er type Outputs Principal Components raster Save to temporary file rr 1 Layer Name of the input layer 2 Options to modify the data type 42 2 Mask To apply a mask enhancement The interface Is Inputs Raster layers Input layer A mdt25B Options Alpha Inverse Outputs Mask raster Save to temporary file vr 1 Input layer 2 Options Alpha values Inverse If this is enabled the mask will be applied to the external areas of the output region and the internal ones will be opaque 2015 gvSIG Page 276 of 371 A a E9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide naaid asociaci n 43 GVSIG GEOPROCESSES MULTISPECTRAL RASTER 43 1 Principal components The interface Is inputs Raster layers Input layer A mdt25B Options Use regions of interest d Outputs Principal Components raster Save to temporary file waa 1 Input layer 2 Use regions of interest of the layer 43 2 Tasseled cap The interface Is 2015 gvSIG Page 277 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide Inputs Raster layers Input layer Options Lise regions of interest a Type Landsat MS Outputs Tasseled Cap raster Save to temporary file rr 1 Input layer 2 Use regions of interest of the layer 3 Type To select the image type LandSat MSS LandSat TM and LandSat ETM For LandSat MSS only for images with 4 bands In the case of LandSat TM
188. erception with respect to the original 3 Change the View layers legend e Aplicar en actual Apply on current view legend Modify the current legends e Crear nueva Create new Create a new View with the original layers and the modified legends 2015 gvSIG Page 371 of 371
189. erlapping within the space avallable in the View 18 3 Advanced labelling Label features in the same way It applies the defined labelling to all the features of the layer The interface contains 1 Select from the dropdown the option User defined labels 2 Select from the dropdown Label features in the same way It will show the different options for this labelling 2015 gvSIG Page 122 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide Enable labeling General User defined labels Classes a Method Label features In the same way 3 Properties New window to set up the characteristics of the labelling 4 Options New dialogue screen to set up the characteristics of the visualization and placement of the labelling 5 Preview Enable layer preview shows a preview of the final result for the labelling For more information see Advanced labelling Common options 18 4 Advanced labels Label only when feature is selected It applies the defined labelling only when the features are selected in he View This labelling is more dinamic if the features selection changes the labels for that new selection will be drawn automatically The interface is the same than the previous one 18 5 Advanced labelling Define classes of features and label each differently With this option is possile to create different labelling types with the Add button give them
190. ers TIPO_LIN pr O Area defined by a distance in meters Selected geometries Dissolve entities Round border Outside the polygon Outputs Buffer vectorial Save to temporary file ai 1 Input To select the input layer from a dropdown menu 2 There are two options to define the area 2015 gvSIG Page 263 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n e Area defined by a field in meters it is possible to select a field of the input layer from which the buffer s radius will be taken e Area defined by a distance in meters it is possible to enter the numeric value of the buffer s radius 3 Selected geometries Option to use only the selected features 4 Dissolve entities only one ring It is possible to fuse the features of the buffer in contact 5 Round border Option to use a round border soften 6 In the case of polygonal features the buffer can be outside the polygon inside of the polygon or both 7 To set the number of buffers or equidistant rings around the input geometries If the input information is correct when executing the geoprocess a dialogue screen will Show the progress telling us the status in the buffer calculation It is possible to cancel it at any time clicking on Cancel In the case of the dissolve entities is not possible to calculate the exact duration so the status bar will not be progressive These process types are called ind
191. es 1 Tabs with the different types of symbols depending on the geometry of the features 2 Symbol library The library contains a group of symbols organized in folders and subfolders The same library can have marker line or fill symbols Select the folder or subfolder to see the symbols 3 Symbol viewer of the symbols in one folder or subfolder Select the symbol to apply or modify 4 Preview of the selected symbol according to the selected properties size rotation angle colour and transparency 5 Options To define colour transparency percentage size and rotation angle of the symbol With the units drop down is possible to choose the unit type to apply By default is pixel but is possible to choose between kilometres meters centimetre millimetres miles yards feet inches degrees and pixels Also is possible to specify if they are units in the word the size will depend on the zoom or in the paper it will have a fixed size in screen and printing If itis an image file svg jpg the colour and transparency will not be applied 6 Buttons to create a new symbol button New or modify the properties of one already existent button Properties In both cases the Symbol Property Editor will open The button Reset to start again with the edition of the symbol deleting all the changes 2015 gvSIG Page 139 of 371 T gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci
192. es 2 Second point of A axis You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Second point of A axis that opens a window for entering the coordinates 3 Length of B axis You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Length of B axis point that opens a window for entering the coordinates or Length of B axis value that opens a window for entering the value of the length of the second axis 28 11 Insert filled ellipse To draw full ellipses The full ellipse is a polygonal feature This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 First point of A axis You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting First point of A axis that opens a window for entering the coordinates 2 Second point of A axis You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Second point of A axis that opens a window for entering the coordinates 3 Length of B axis You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of
193. essing time lt 15 So the greather refresh rate the more time is required to draw a map Layer order in TOC It sets the position where a new layer in the TOC will be placed and thus the display order sorting Default order Description Layers are placed always on top Grid You set up the options grid 2015 gvSIG Page 41 of 371 2 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide C asociaci n Show grid Adjust grid Y distance jCRS Through the Plugin Manager you can install different versions of the EPSG data base In this section we can select if you have more than one EPSG database installed base which we want to work with Select the EPSG data base to use jCRS EPSG version 8 7 _Use cache for CRSs 2015 gvSIG Page 42 of 371 9 gvsic gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n 9 VIEW DOCUMENT 8 1 Create a view To create a new View in a gvSIG project from the Project manager 1 Select the View icon 2 Choose the button New then automatically the View is open A new view with the name Untitled appears by default You can change it by clicking the button Rename from the project manager The View that we want to rename should be selected Then a dialog box appears where we can type the new name Q Type the new na
194. esults pages e Selecting the place name from the result list and clicking Localize the View will be focused on the place name O 2015 gvSIG Page 169 of 371 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 24 CONSULTING TOOLS 24 1 Introduction These tools are for getting information from the layers and are available from the Layer Query menu or in its specific buttons in the toolbar Menu Toolbar os 2 2 Information by point al Area T Distance Export to anotation Z Start editing Properties Let s see all the available tools Icon Tool Shortcut Description key o Information by To see the attribute values for one entity point ES Query area To measure areas and perimeters It is possible to draw a polygon over the View area and obtain the area and peimeter LEY Query distance To measure distances It is possible to draw E i lines and obtain the lenght p Hyperlink To see the hyperlinks of any entity 24 2 Information With this tool is possible to see the attribute values for one entity This tool is available from the Layer Query menu or in its specific buttons in the toolbar The steps to follow are 1 Activate in TOC the layer or layers which contains the elements to be identified 2 Click on Information 3 Click on in any point of the area of the View frame to identify the entities of the ubication 2015 gvSIG Page 170 of 371 q
195. event theme a Zoom in tool Query i Q ao out tool o PAE a Previous zoom 3 Zoom to all Locator setup E oe 4 Zoom to selection C Locate by attribute Export Center view to point E Frame manager Let s see all the available tools Icon Tool Shortcut Description key Pan y This allows you to change the View frame by dragging the viewing field all over the View with the mouse Click and hold down de primary button of the mouse and move it in the required direction Zoom in to center Zoom in to the center of the View data Zoom out from center Zoom out from the center of the View data Enlarges a particular area of the View ale H E Zoom in too Q Zoom out tool Reduces a particular area of the View Previous zoom A To go back to the previous used zoom Zoom to all Full extent zoom of the total area defined by 2015 gvSIG Page 162 of 371 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n all the layers of the View ior Zoom to selection Full zoom of the area with all the selected elements Cy Locate by attribute Zoom in the area of the layer defined by one specific attribute ae Center view to Locate any point in the View by its a point coordinates and centre the View on this point L Frame manager Save and go back to many zooms as you want Zoom to layer Zoom to the total extension of the layer Right click on the sele
196. eview Presley ls not ea llable Options Width Height Units Pixels In the world New Reset Properties Cancel Selecting one image and clicking Properties a new window will open to indicate the label ubication referred to the image O Edit style labeled_point Clicking on A the area rectangle to be used for the label or labels will be set up O 2015 gvSIG Page 127 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG L asociaci n 5 Preview area of the defined label It is not possible to put as a background style a line layer if the option choosen is represents the sign following the line Placement To set up the properties of the labelling placement location orientation duplication The options of Placement properties will change depending on the layer geometry points lines or polygons In the case of multigeometric layers dwg dxf gml the interface contains a tab for each type of geometry points lines polygons For the dot layers the interface Is Placement properties Point settings O Offest labels horizontally around the point Preferable at the right top corner but all positions are allowed Change location Priority O Blocked 1 Highest 3 Lowest Offset labels on top of the points Duplicate layers D Remove duplicate labels O Place one label per feature Place one label per feature part OK C
197. f the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting First point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 2 Second point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Second point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 28 17 Insert rectangle To draw rectangles defined by two points of the opposite corners The rectangle Is a linear feature This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 First point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting First point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 2 Second point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Second point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 28 18 Insert filled spline curve To draw filled spline curves The filled spline curve is a polygonal feature This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 2015 gvSIG Page 197 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 09 gvSIG asociaci n 1 Insert point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the m
198. ferencing a file rmf text is created with the necessary information for the location of the image The interface is as follows w4 464 2753 Pmxj2s pios Rotxjo Roto elle 0 lo aa Ap ly q e Allows to define transformation Text entries labeled X Y X Pix Pix And Rot X Rot and contain the current position data upper left X coordinate Y coordinate position on upper left pixel size on X the pixel size on Y X and Y rotation respectively If we change these values from the keyboard these will be updated on the image e Buttons from left to right o Gets the tool focus o Center raster layer on View Con este bot n centramos el raster en la Vista actual independientemente del zoom que haya seleccionado Las coordenadas seran calculadas automaticamente o Inicializate with disk transormation Reset all the transformations that have been applied o Go to first transformation Assign the first transformation it was applied o Go to last transformation Assigns previous transformation to the currentAssigns previous transformation to the current o Go to next transformation Assign the following transformation to the current 2015 gvSIG Page 239 of 371 NN A gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide P asociaci n o To load georeferencing coordintaes from tfw file The extension must be tfw or wild o Save current transformation as default rmf file Save the currently active transformation in the r
199. from the Table document These tools are available from Table menu and its relevant button bar The available edition tools are Icon Tool Shortkey Description a Field calculator To make operations with the fields of the table XY Add X and Y To add two new fields to the table with X and Y coordinates length latitude Only avallable for attribute tables e Start editing To start editing one Table Only available for alphanumeric tables EA Finish Editing To finish editing one Table Only available for alphanumeric tables Ha Add row To add one row to the table EA Remove row To delete the selected row ES Add column To add one column to the Table p Rename column To rename one field ite Remove column To delete the selected field F Column manager To access to the column manager 61 2 Add column To add a new column to the table This tool is available from the Table menu and its relevant button bar It shows one window to select the characteristics of the column 2015 gvSIG Page 328 of 371 9 gvsic gvSIG 2 2 User guide le asociacion Field name Field Type St ring Length Precision pefautvaue e Field name e Type Dropdown with the available types e Length Field length Maximum is 254 e Precision Number of decimals for the numeric fields double e Default value It is possible to set a default value for all the records of the table 61 3 Column manager To add remo
200. ge runalg maxvaluegrid INPUT Multiple Input Raster Layer NODATA Boolean RESULT Output raster layer The next line shows a valid use example gt runalg maxvaluegrid lyr1 lyr2 lyr3 false Of course lyr1 lyr2 and lyr3 must be valid layers already loaded into your GIS When the multiple input is comprised of raster bands each element is represented by a pair of values layer band For example for the cluster algorithm Usage runalg cluster INPUT Multiple Input Band NUMCLASS Numerical Value RESULTLAYER output raster layer RESULTTABLE output table A valid example is gt runalg cluster lyr1 1 lyrl 2 lyr2 2 5 The algorithm will use three bands two of them from lyr1 the first and the second ones of that layer and one from lyr2 its second band 2015 gvSIG Page 293 of 371 TN CC gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide y asociaci n e Table Field from XXX Write the name of the field to use This parameter is case sensitive e Fixed Table Type the list of all table values separated by commas and enclosed between quotes Values start on the upper row and go from left to right Here is an example runalg kernelfilter mdt25 asc 1 1 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 e Point The two coordinates must be separated with a comma and in quotes Example 220345 4453616 Input parameters such as strings or numerical values have default
201. graphic transformations or F F iF Export to ave as Ctrl t Ak S Li s TL clipping Ctrl Alt c El c hange data type Ey Raster properties Ctri alt P Let s have a look at every available tool Icon Tool Hotkey Description i Raster properties Ctrl Alt P It allows to access to the raster properties E Select raster layer It allows users to enable a raster layer by clicking on it in the working area Histogram Ctrl Alt H It allows to consult and modify the raster histogram 7 Color tables Ctrl Alt T It allows to assign color tables to a raster ina Single band image o Information by It gives associated information to a pixel point cy Area of interest Ctri Alt A It allows to define regions of interest ROIs over a raster layer Generate Ctri Alt O It allows to generate pyramids The pyramids overviews are lower resolution versions of the original image which allow a quick load of very big images Hi Analysis view It is a tool used for a quick inspection It has O 2015 gvSIG Page 210 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide En F Go to the next previous resolution level Create layer multifile Principal components Tasseled cap RGB Filters Ctrl Alt F Radiometric Ctrl Alt E enhancement Mask by region of interest Reproject layer Ctri Alt R Geolocalization Ctri Alt G Set projection Georeferencing Save view to georeferenced raster
202. h tables e The second one to calculate the differences between the first and the second one e The third one to calculate the differences between the second and the first one 2015 gvSIG Page 274 of 371 2 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide C asociaci n The interface is Inputs Vector layer Input layer 1 INFRAE Lin CtraEje Input layer 2 INFRAE Sym CtraPk Options Selected features Cover 1 Selected features Cover 2 Outputs Union layerl vector Save to temporary file Union layer2 vector Save to temporary file 1 Input layer To select the layers 2 Selected features Option to use only the selected features The results of unions with different geometries are e Between a polygonal layer and one point layer the output layers will be one point layer and another polygonal layer e Between a polygonal layer and one linear layer the output layers will be one linear layer and another polygonal layer e Between two linear layers the output layers will be one linear layer and another point layer with the intersection between them 2015 gvSIG Page 275 of 371 2 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide ai asociaci n C 42 GVSIG GEOPROCESSES RASTER LAYERS 42 1 Change data type To change the data type of the raster The interface is Inputs Raster layers Input layer A mdt25B Options Data type of the result From decimal to integer From greater type to less
203. hart document will be called Untitled It is possible to change the name clicking on Rename in the Project manager having the Chart document selected A dialog screen will open for typing the new name fs Rename Y Type the new name Untitled Loox With Delete button oft the Project manager the selected charts will be deleted With Open button of the Project manager the selected charts will open 72 3 Create plot To add a new plot in the Chart document One Chart Document can have a determined number of plots 2015 gvSIG Page 344 of 371 2 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide a asociaci n C This tool is available from the Chart menu in its relevant button bar and with the Create Plot in the window Chart Properties The interface shows the steps to follow for definiyng the chart parameters Add a new variable Chart type i Data origin Chart format it Description Chart rederer types Drawing options 8 Pie chart li Bars chart EX XY Chart TemporalChart Dimension zD Domain axis type Default x Serie type Orientation C Flip axis Legend tooltip urls Previous Ac cept 1 Chart rendered types It defines the type of chart for representing the data In each type is possible to define the different characteristics to adapt the charts to the data e Name Chart name e Description It is possible to describ
204. he RGB transparents in the layer by clicking on Add Three different values will be added separated with amp or These values mean the RGB value of the pixel which will be trabsparent The added values are those that appear on the text boxes the alpha value is optional The information in these text boxes can be changed by three methods typing the value varying the color sliders or by clicling on the View a colour value This last option will be activated clicking on Select RGB clicking on the View This activates a gvSIG tool in the View to change the RGB values in the transparency box If we add the line 255 0 0 all the pixels with the red colour set as the maximum 255 and green and blue set as the minimum 0 all of them will be transparent All the full red pixels will be transparent The symbol amp can be changed with And y Or If Or is activated any new entry in the table will appear with the symbol If we add the line 255 O 0 all the pixels with a red value of 255 or with a green value O or with a blue value O will be transparent 19 5 Enhance It provides a tool for making enhancements over the raster coverage It allows to modify brightness contrast and enhance This last option is essential for correct viewing of images of 16 bits The interface Is 2015 gvSIG Page 136 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n Brightness and Contrast Enhance Activa
205. he available ones in the gvSIG project It is possible to use one layer of any of the available Views e One vector layer to select from all the available ones in the gvSIG project It is possible to use one layer of any of the available Views e One table to select from all the available ones in the gvSIG project e One method or function to to select from all the available ones e Anumeric value to enter in the text box e One string text e A field of one table e One band to choose from the ones of the raster layer e An element just of raster layers bands of raster layer vector layers or tables to select from all the available ones in the gvSIG project In this case the parameter value in the right side has a button When it is pressed all the available elements to choose from will appear e One file or a disk folder e One point of the view with its coordinates X and Y It is possible as well to clik on the button and select any of the captured points 2015 gvSIG Page 259 of 371 NN A 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n e One table for editing by the user If you have already executed the same algorithm in a previous session or the actual one you will find in the bottom part a new component Clicking on the buttons to the right and left you can recover automatically the assigned values to the algorithm in the previous executions making easier to fill the needed fields By default the window wil
206. he legend of a layer in the TOC H 4 A ne 10m rivers lake _centerlines F dri v amp ne 10m_admin_0 countries Mil Antarctica A legend is hidden when the mark of dropdown appears East Asia amp Pacific with a When a is shown the legend is unfolded and on display 14 5 Change the order of layers in the TOC The order in which the layers appears in the TOC is important because it corresponds to the display order The layers of the upper TOC are drawn on top of which are below It is desirable that layers formed by text elements points and lines are at the top leaving the lower positions of TOC for polygonal layers and images that form the background of the view To move and change the order of the layers in the TOC place the cursor over them click the left mouse button and holding it drag the layer to the desired location You can also select multiple layers in the TOC pressing Control or Shift key while selecting with the left mouse button 14 6 Layer context menu p A ne_10m_populated places Clicking the right mouse button on an B V J ne_lOm_rivers_le Start editing active layer shows the contextual menu dr v Mine _10m_admin_4 S layer _ Antarctica Rename lEastAsia amp l This menu contains some of the most Europe amp ce Attributes table common features that perform on a layer m _ Latin Americ Properties Middle East fl North Amerig Zoom to layer pu
207. he right side there will be a panel with controls which saved options are selected This panel will have a different appearance depending on the selected output format In some formats will be no controls O 2015 gvSIG Page 249 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 38 3 Clipping 9 gvsic asociaci n Allows to generate a new layer as a raster cut varying the extension the level of resolution order and number of bands of the resulting layer Available from the Layer Export to menu in the export raster bar button raster and the geoprocessing toolbox The interface is as follows D Clipping Coordinates Spatial resolution Bands selection Options Pixel coordinates Ol XA 3 797 Y3 744 Real coordinates L X 725 046 746 4 373 743 9 O 728 085 653 4 370 747 4 Apply Accept Cancel e Coordinates tab Shows the text boxes with the pixel coordinates and real coordinates The two above text boxes corresponding with the coordinates of the upper left corner and lower with the lower right corner When we change the data of pixel coordinate the reals are calculated automatically and vice versa The avallable buttons are Icono Herramienta E Load parameters Descripci n Allows to load the cutting parameters fe Save parameters he Round off pixels e O 2015 gvSIG Adjust to maximun extension defined Allows to save the cut parameters
208. ically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Middle point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 28 6 Insert circle centre and radius To draw circles indicating the centre and radius which define the circle The circle is a linear feature This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Centre You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Centre that opens a window for entering the coordinates 2 Radius You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Radius point that opens a window for entering the coordinates or Radious value that opens a window for entering the value 28 7 Insert circumference centre and radius To draw circumferences indicating the centre and radius which define the circumference The circumference is a polygonal feature This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar 2015 gvSIG Page 193 of 371 Es gvSIG P gvSIG 2 2 User guide er asociacion The steps are 1 Centre You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the
209. ich you can select the dimension of its side using the pull down button in Window side When the filter is applied the low frequencies are emphasized Page 230 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 2 gvSIG asociaci n C Sharpen Filter of Sharpen Active O hrs It allows to modify the sharpness and select the contrast values from 1 to 100 When increasing the contrast you can also increase the image imperfection and the noise in the gradual areas of colour Gauss Filter of Gauss Active It applies a kernel matrix in which you can select the dimension of its side using the pull down button in Window side There is a maximum value in the central pixel and it decreases to the extremes Filter of Custom Active Kernel Divisor o It is a kernel matrix of 5x5 or of 3x3 introducing directly the value of the boxes Divisor The result of the previous calculation will be divided by this divisor Filter of Mode Active Mode Window side E 2015 gvSIG Page 231 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n f It applies a kernel matrix in which you can select the dimension of its side using the scroll bar in Window side This filter takes the most frecuent value that is the value that appears more in the neighborhood Colour adjust RGB gt HSL Filter of RGB gt HSL Active Data type Byte Conversion from RGB to HSL It
210. ici n o mediante el cuadro de di logo que aparece al hacer clic en el bot n lateral Este cuadro de di logo permite la selecci n de m ltiples archivos Si el par metro editado es una selecci n m ltiple todos los nombres de archivo pasan a la celda separados por comas En caso de ser una capa simple o una tabla el nombre del primer archivo pasa a la celda y los restantes se ponen en las celdas situadas por debajo de sta De este modo se facilita la ejecuci n de un proceso sobre un conjunto de archivos tales como todos los de una carpeta En el caso de requerirse la selecci n de m ltiples bandas aparece un cuadro algo m s complejo con una nueva tabla En ella debe seleccionarse en la columna izquierda el fichero deseado y en la columna derecha las bandas de ste a emplear Por defecto se pueden escoger bandas en el rango 1 250 ya que a priori no se conoce el n mero de bandas del archivo ser a necesario abrirlo Si se selecciona una banda por encima del rango de bandas disponibles en un archivo dado se arrojar un error informar de ello una vez se lance la ejecuci n del proceso por lotes Para el caso de archivos de salida no existe la opci n de almacenar el resultado en un archivo temporal siendo obligatorio especificar un nombre de archivo para guardarlo de forma permanente Tambi n en este caso encontramos un elemento que facilita el rellenar las celdas correspondientes El cuadro de di logo que aparece en este caso
211. icking on them a logic operator to the query Known values Lists the values present in the layer attribute table for the selected field Double click on the value to add it to the selection query L the query 2 expression 3 4 Expression Text box reporting the query that is going to be run It allows direct typing NAMEASCII Y Select by attributes ne 10m populated places OE Table filter Fields Seance I Fields Contents j SCALERAN Aalborg i NATSCALE CIA FCs Arran l A i a pipe FEATURECLA e rh Abadan NAME La gt LES LZ Abadla NAMEPAR land or not Co panes NAMEALT A Delete text A l DIFFASCII eau ADAKAN ADMOCAP NAME Abancay I I gt Add to set e PE 1 Select from set l de co E nu 1 Selection Options O 2015 New set Create a new selection Add to set Apply the query considering the already existing query and sum the result Select from set Apply the query only to the already selected features gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n 26 GRAPHIC EDITING TOOLS 26 1 Introduction To create and edit various types of vector data with some feature formats Other formats are read only and don t allow editing To add or modify elements of one layer it requires that the layer is active and in editing mode Depending on the layer type the opt
212. ill recover that selected zoom e Delete button Delete the selected zoom from the list 23 3 Center View to point Center the View to one point with its specific coordinates This tool is available in the View Navigation Center View to point and in the specific tool bar The interface is Input any required coordinates and select the colour of the point Clicking Accept the zoom will be focused on that point and it will show an information screen of that point 2015 gvSIG Page 164 of 371 em OA gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG lasociaci n 23 4 Locate by attribute This tool allows to zoom in the entities of one layer with a particular attribute It is available in the View Navigation Locate by attribute and in the specific toolbar The interface is e Layer Drop down menu for selecting any available layer of the View e Field Drop down menu for selecting one field of the selected layer of the View e Value Drop down menu for selecting one value from the selected field Go button It will show a zoom of the View which contains all the entities of the layer with the indicated attribute 23 5 Locator map The locator is a general map which is displayed in the bottom left corner of the View s window and it will locate the working area main window zoom Available in View Locator Map menu low Map Tools
213. indicate that it was wrong selected the correspondence between points It can also indicate the possibility that the geometric model requires a few more points The available tools are Icono Herramienta Descripci n ld First Select the first point of the table Pevious Select the previous point to selected 4 2015 gvSIG Page 244 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide S gvSIG asociaci n Next Select the next point to selected pL Last Select the last point of the table b New Create a new item in the table Delete selected Deletes the selected point point i x Delete all Deletes all points in the table Up Down Select the previous point next to selected 2 Icono Georeferencing processing tools Herramienta al las csv 2015 gvSIG Pp Move Point a Drag Point H Center view to selected point Save control points in raster metadata file Load from XML file rmf Export table of Descripcion Allows to move a control point Allows to drag a control point Center the view in relation to the selected control point Save control points in the metadata file attached to the selected raster Retrieves the control points from metadata file attached to raster Exports the table to a csv file Page 245 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide gvSIG asociaci n C points into a text file Load control points from
214. ing the model in the canvas Once the model has been designed it can be executed clicking on the Execute button The execution window will have a parameters tab automatically created based on the requirements of the model the inputs added to it just like it happens when a simple algorithm is executed If any of the algorithms of the model generates raster layers the Raster output tab will be added to the window Elements can be dragged to a different position within the canvas to change the way the module structure is displayed and make it more clear and intuitive Links between elements are update automatically To change the parameters of any of the algorithms of a model double click on it to access its parameters window To delete an element right click on it and select Delete Only those elements that do not have any other one depending on them can be deleted If you try to delete an element that cannot be deleted SEXTANTE will show the following warning message 47 5 Saving and loading models Models can be saved to be executed or edited at a later time Use the Save button to save the current model and the Open model to open any model previously saved Model are saved in an XML file with the model extension Models saved on the models folder will appear in the toolbox in a group that you can set using the boxes in the top of the modeler window Type in the name of the model and then select a group from the drop down list The l
215. int using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Second point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 27 8 Split geometry To divide a geometry in various geometries using a cutting element The resultant geometries will have the same attributes This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To end the selection press Enter 2 Select one inserting tool to draw the cutting element 27 9 Split line in one point Split one line from a specified point This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To end the selection press Enter 2 Cutting point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 27 10 Scale geometry To resize the geometry using a scale value This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature
216. ions e Typical installation This option installs the plug ins by default It does not allow add any add on during the installation process e Advanced Installation This option allows the Add ons Manager access select the add ons that we want to add in a typicall installation For more information read Add on Manager section Note During the set up process we can install all functional plug ins but not the symbol libraries That has to be done after the installation process is finished It can be installed executing the Add ons Manager in gvSIG Tools menu Once we select the plug ins or the Typical installation we must click on Next Step 7 Completing the installation A new pop up window informs us about the installation progress and it indicates the number of add ons package that are being installed Once the process is finished click on Finish 2015 gvSIG Page 21 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide gvSIG asociaci n o gvSIG packages installer Progress Package install KAKI E A Finished 72 72 Cancel The last pop up window informs us about the completion of the installation process and Shows us three check boxes e View Readme e Launch gvSIG Desktop e Create Desktop Shortcup Click on Finish 2015 gvSIG Page 22 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide gvSIG desktop Setup InstallJammer Wizard Complete The T Miz
217. ions will be different These tools are available from Layer menu and Remove Insert and Modify submenus from the Edit menu and from the specific button bar Button bar 20o O O R 0m G6 Oe IIP A Tii A HA Re Hi Insert point es Insert MultiPoint e Insert line p Insert are Insert circle center amp radius 6 Insert circumference center amp radius Insert circle three point O Insert circumference three points Insert ellipse Insert filled ellipse Insert polygon 2 Insert polyline Insert filled regular polygon J Insert regular polygon Insert filled rectangle Co Insert rectangle 3 Insert filled spline 8 Insert spline curve 22 Insert autopolygon og Rectangular matrix of geometries ee Polar matrix of geometries 2015 gvSIG Menu Ah Symmetrical geometry 3 Internal polygon Explode geometry a Move geometry Rotate geometry amp Duplicate geometry lt P Split geometry C Split line open by a point Of Scale geometry 4 Simplify geometry Qa Join geometries fl Stretch geometry Trim line by object Extend line to object Pa Smooth line AF Edit vertex aste features pe E Remove Delete Page 178 of 371 gvSIG asociacion C gvSIG 2 2 User guide gt Undo Redo EN Undo redo history EF Disable snapping F3 gvSIG allows to have more than one layer active at
218. ip cover To select the layer to use as clip layer 3 Selected features Option to use only the selected features input and clip layer as a result a new layer with only the features inside of the area defined by the clip layer will be created By default three new output layers will be made allowing to the user to discard any of them When the geoprocess finishes the new layers will be included in the TOC 2015 gvSIG Page 266 of 371 gee ee gvSIG 2 2 User guide 41 6 Split lines To split lines in equal size sections The interface Is inputs Vector layer Input layer Options Selected geometries Distance section Outputs Splitlines line vector 1 Input layer gvSIG asociacion f Save to temporary file 2 Selected features Option to use only the selected features 3 Distance between sections To set the size of the lines The last part of the line has not to be the same that the defined distance When the geoprocess finishs the new layer will be included in the TOC 41 7 X and Y shift To apply a shift change over all the points lines and polygons of the input layer For that the shift in X and Y has to be defined The interface Is Inputs Vector layer Input layer Options Selected features Input cover X shift Y shift Outputs XY Shift_polygon vector X Shift_line vector XYShift_ point vector 1 Input layer m El D H o o a o i E
219. ired is determined by the formula order 1 order 2 2 that is for a polynomial one grade at least three points are required for two grade need six points to three grade ten points Interface Without reference cartography _ e m e e e a e e e e e e e M e e o e e a P k 154715 118 de 1 AA PERBERE E Ba No World X Word Y image A image Y Error X Errar Y RMS e o 730072456 15453 250111254969 15263 831 102094406 0 0 0 0 od 1 0 0 6915 1872841167 13 8321 177095697587 0 0 0 0 q 0 0 al a 4 kb d j gt d Register u 42s h eee 2 e 9 interface With reference cartography lolis cal o 0 9 0 0 MC Teo 7 Work 7 7 word imag pel Paga Td Te 1437416 3043 2002 SG 2206438400 0 0 4 Register 14 4 1 a 2015 gvSIG Page 242 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG lasociaci n View There will be one in the case of Without reference cartography and two of With reference cartography The left contains the cartography base load in the gvSIG View and the right the image we want georeference In the top left corner the coordinates of the mouse cursor are shown In reference cartography the coordinates are those of the real world In the image to be georeferenced the coordinates are in pixel relative to the top left corner A cursor appears with a central window in the middle
220. is way the history can be consulted run the actions from it and making easier the repetition of processes 2015 gvSIG Page 254 of 371 2 gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide 1 Points Clear history Clear log Command line To automatize task by creating scripts ds Command line E e E O BeanShell 2 0b4 by Pat Niemeyer pat pat net bsh Results It allows to the users to get the generated results in the current session Data explorer It opens a new window with the information of the available layers and tables of the project 2015 gvSIG Page 255 of 371 Ee 2 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide Pr asociacion gt Data co Raster layers Del Vector layers E Tables e Geoprocessing help e Catch coordinates To catch the coordinates clicking on the View These coordinates can be used in some geoprocesses 2015 gvSIG Page 256 of 371 ta lle Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 40 TOOLBOX 40 1 Introduction The toolbox is the main element of the graphic interface for the application of the geoprocesses and is one of the most used on daily basis lt shows all the available geoprocesses making easier its use From the toolbox a geoprocess or model can be executed The interface Is g Toolbox 355 Tools 00 Algorithms e gVSIG Geoprocesses S Multispectral raster p Principal Components g Tasseled Cap S Raster layers pal B Change data type A Mask H Vector
221. ist contains all the names of the already existing groups and also an additional group named Models If none of this group suits your needs you can type a new name directly in that box which ts editable When the toolbox is invoked SEXTANTE searches the models folder for files with model extension and loads the models they contain Since a model is itself a SEXTANTE algorithm it can be added to the toolbox just like any other algorithm 2015 gvSIG Page 288 of 371 nS gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide ra uii asociaci n f The models folder can be set from the SEXTANTE toolbox clicking the configuration button and then introducing the path to the folder in the corresponding field Go to the Folders tab to find it Models loaded from the models folder appear not only in the toolbox but also in the algorithms tree in the Processes tab of the modeler window That means that you can incorporate a model as a part of a bigger model just as you add any other algorithm however models are shown with a different icon to make it easy to recognize them 2015 gvSIG Page 289 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n 48 COMMAND LINE 48 1 Introduction The command line interface allows advanced users to increase their productivity and performe complex operations with simple scripts It is available from Tools Geoprocessing Command line The interface is g Command line e ea Be 0 BeanShell 2
222. ith the Remove join tool from the Table menu or its relevant button bar 59 3 Link It allows to create a link between two Tables One link is a connection between tables allowing that any change in one table appears also in the other one for instance a selection The related data will not be attached as in the joining case To make the link both tables must have a common field which it will be the linking point the field name doesn t need to be the same but yes the data type This tool is available from the Table menu or its relevant button bar The interface gives the steps to make the link Select origin table of the join Table of attributes rdline japorl e Next Cancel 1 Select origin table of the link Dropdown menu with all the available tables to select Click on Next o JE Select field to use for link RDLINE ID e Previous Next Cancel 2015 gvSIG Page 323 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n 2 Select field to use for the link Dropdown menu with all the available fields to select Click on Next Select table to link Table of attributes aepoint_japonl e Previous Next Cancel 3 Select table to link Droodown menu with all the available tables to select Click on Next Select field to use for link AEPOINT ID Previous Wax Finish Cancel 4 Select field to use for link Dropdown menu with all the available fields to select
223. ities Graduated symbols To represent quantities using the symbol size to show relative values Within a value range all the elements will have the same symbol The interface contains Fields Symbol m m e e e e e e e m I Size Classification field POP_EST D I From 1 00f 2 Interval type Naturalintervals e 10 00 5 Nr of intervals 1 Template o FT Other values B lll 99 0 3 1129225E7 99 31 129 225 3 2369558E7 1 11211789E8 32 369 558 111 211 789 1 27 0 86 9E8 3 11397 3E8 O 313 973 000 1 166079217E9 1 33861 2968 1 186 079 217 1 338 61 2 968 O ute intervals l Add Remove all Remove 1 Fields Options for defining the intervals Classification field To choose the numeric field from which the intervals will be calculated Interval types There are three interval types e Equal intervals Calculate equal intervals from the values found in the selected field to make the classification e Natural intervals The number of intervals are specified and the sample of this number is divided into tyhis number according to the Jenk optimisation method regarding to the natural localization of intervals e Quantile intervals The number of intervals are specified and the sample is divided into this number but putting them into groups according to their order 2015 gvSIG Page 113 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n
224. ize of the geometry iy Join geometries To join geometries a Insert autopolygon To insert a polygon next to the existing ones O 2015 gvSIG Page 181 of 371 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n 1A Stretch geometries To stretch a geometry moving the selected vertex f Extend line to To extend one line to one object object 4 Cut line with one To cut one line with a cutting edge defined object by other objects A Smooth line To smooth the angles of one line fe Edit vertex To edit the vertex of one geometry move remove or add Copy features To copy selected elements to the clipboard E Paste features To paste copied features from the clipboard E Delete To delete the selected features 27 2 Symmetry To create symmetries of the existing features The resulting geometries will have the same attributes This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To end the selection press Enter 2 First point on the axis of the symmetry You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting First point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 3 Second point on the axis of symmetry You can
225. l have the last session s values The geoprocesses generate different output elements e A raster layer e A vector layer e Atable e Agraphic element curve bar diagram e An HTML text element The layers and tables can be saved as a permanent file in disk with a route path entered in the textbox or select them clicking on the button on its right and using the screen dialogue If the route is not indicated a temporary file will be created By default the result layers will be saved in e shp format for vector layers e tif format for raster layers By default the result layers will be saved in the defined route in the toolbox General option Output folder Toolbox Settings settings as k See Default output folder home alvare m gvSIG Modify output names ee L Scripts Use internal names for outputs Models TT T TT T 7 22 Default no data value 99999 0 Toolbox Edit groups Show recently used algorithms If the Modify output names box is checked it will automatically replace all non standard characters accented vowels brackets parentheses appearing on the names of objects when executing the algorithm In addition to layers and tables geoprocesses can generate text and image results These are stored in memory and displayed at the end the execution of the algorithm in a new window called Results This window stores the results
226. lated Histogram which shows the accumulated number of pixels for every pixel value The graph is therefore ascending e Logarithmic It assigns the logarithm s value of the histogram in every position This allows to visualize a much more balanced histogram without excessive peaks which hide the rest 3 Bands It allows to enable the bands that will be displayed in the graph It allows users to select bands by clicking on them with the Control key pressed we will be able to select several bands When a band is selected by hovering the mouse over a point in the graph the name and the value of the point will appear 4 Graph Viewing area of the histogram We can zoom in and out of the graph using the mouse directly over the graph To zoom in one part of the graph draw a rectangle over it by pressing and dragging the mouse to the right To return to the original graph click on the left mouse button on any point in the graph and drag to the left then release the mouse button The controls that appear under the graph allow the user to restrict the range of values X axis of the histogram on which the histogram is based The default setting is the complete range so that for example in a Byte data type image the Statistics are calculated for all the pixel valued from O to 255 You can enter the values directly in the text boxes or use the and controls next to the text boxes You can also slide the triangles over the s
227. lculate Y coordinate of one point 2015 gvSIG Page 331 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide C 62 EXPORT TABLE 62 1 Export table To export one table This tool is available from the Table menu The interface with all the steps to export the table is Select the format to export DEF format DataBase throws JDBC format 1 Select the format to export from the available ones Click on Next Select file DOO fa Options 2 Select file To indicate the location for the file There is an option of encoding the table Click on Next rExport options Select the records to export 2 All records O Only selected records GML DXF _ Filtered jiii O Use a saved expression O New expression Expression name optional pO Expression IN Filter Test 3 Export options To indicate the records to export GML O 2015 gvSIG Page 332 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide e All records e Only selected records e Filtered records It is possible to set up one filtering expression Once the export is finished a new window will appear with the option for adding a new table to the project s Add table Y Add the table to the project O 2015 gvSIG Page 333 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide Es 63 MAPA O 2015 gvSIG Page 334 of 371 A le gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guid
228. ld The chart will be proportional to a specific field o Draw symbols within specific boundaries Only the symbols within this range will be drawn avoiding the rest 2015 gvSIG Page 115 of 371 ND O E9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n O Set symbol size O Fixed height O Tama o variable de la suma de los valores representados Field size Field POB normalize by Units Boundaries Pixels lc From 7 To In the world OK Cancel 17 10 Multiple attributes Pies To represent numeric values of one element using pie charts These charts show how the individual parts p rform within a full group They are usefule when there are not many categories The interface contains Fields O E color Field label Background POB fo 014 014 j show pvivienz g gt 1565 15 55 a Viviendas E 66_ 66_ Densidad pr i EER I AAA I 4 00 j o I I I T I gt l I p l l I l i i l i Ar an 5 ae Color schema i ii 2 6 Size II Only rows selected OS 1 Fields List of all the available numeric field to be part of the chart 2015 gvSIG Page 116 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n 2 Colour scheme Drop down menu to choose the colour scheme which will be used in the chart by default 3 Buttons to add remove all the fields or the selected ones
229. le click 3 On the right bottom side the distance of the last line Dist and the sumatory of all the measured lines Total can be found Dist 91 254 91 m T 398 498 94 m 24 5 Hyperlink To consult the hyperlinks of one entity The hyperlink is one link to other resource image website and it is associated to the elements of one layer This tool is available in its specific toolbar The steps to follow are 1 Inthe layer properties the hyperlink option must be activated 2 Activate in TOC the layer with the elements whose hyperlinks are going to be consulted 3 Click on Hyperlink 4 Clicko on the element 5 The hyperlink results will appear These results will depend on the hyperlink properties image PDF 2015 gvSIG Page 172 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n f gvSIG 2 2 User guide 25 SELECTION TOOLS 25 1 Introduction These tools are the ones that allow you to select a group of features in a layer ome tools in gvSIG can work only on selected features The selection of vector features can be performed both from the view like from the attributes table associated with a layer These tools are available from the Layer Selection menu on the corresponding button bar Menu Button bar 4 Select by rectangle Ge Select by polygon Select by polyline Ch Select by circle amp Select by buffer Select by layer Y Select by attributes Y Select all 60 Reverse Clear
230. le icon 3 Click on button New The window to add the table is opened allowing select database source File or DB database 0 New table i File DB Adel 4 With button Delete of Project Manager the selected tables are eliminated 5 With the button Open of Project Manager the selected tables are opened 58 2 Add a file In File tab if we click on button Add will open a new window that allow us to navigate to the file we want to ado Added the file we ll see how it s listed To modify load parameters of the table we need to select the layer on the list and click the button Properties 2015 gvSIG Page 316 of 371 ND O gvSIG 2 2 User guide 9 gvsic asociaci n A new window with two tabs will be opened Basic and Advanced The property that can be more useful from all to the correct visualization of the data are Encoding and locale Clicking OK the tables will be added to the project 58 3 Add a database Allow access to user to databases in a simple and unified way to different providers gvSIG will store different connections that are been made in different sessions This manner it s not necessary introduce again parameters of each server to what we ll connect Same way if we open a project file that have one database connection will be just asked us the password The steps to add a table of a DB are File DB Choos
231. lect it from the list with the different user s CRS available y click OK e Choose the Edit button to modify an existing user s CRS e Choose the Remove button to delete an existing user s CRS e Choose the New button to create a new CRS This option will open a new dialog box with three tabs o User CRS o Datum o Coordinate System Let s see each of them 2015 gvSIG Page 48 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 9 9sIG asociaci n User CRS i Datum i Coordinate system a From user definitions O Fram an existing CRS EPSG 4326 il C Fram a WET String The user CRS tab lets you Select from three options to create the CRS e From user definitions You can put manually all information By selecting this option the Datum and Coordinate system panel tabs are shown empty e From an existing CRS You can choose a CRS from EPSG pressing the button and upload you Datum and Coordinate system data being able to create the new CRS from these data e From a wkt string Similar to the previous option upload Datum and Coordinate system data from CRS defined by the wkt string entered You can paste a wkt string using the Ctrl V shortcut The data contained in the Datum and Coordinate system panel are shown in the following images 2015 gvSIG Page 49 of 371 ND Tre 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide a as
232. lected features This tool is available from the relevant button bar O 2015 gvSIG Page 190 of 371 EL gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n 28 TOOLS FOR INSERTING FEATURES 28 1 Introduction To insert features in one layer in editing mode Once the tool is executed press the right button to access to a contextual menu which allows to select between the different tool options indicate points with its exact coordinates Let s see all the available tools Icon Tool Shortkey Description o Insert point To draw points don Insert multipoint To draw multipoints Insert line To draw lines Insert arch To draw archs Insert circle centre To draw circles indicating the centre and and radius radius G Insert To draw circumferences indicating the centre circumference and radius centre and radius Insert circle three To draw circles indicating three points points Insert To draw circumferences indicating three circumference points three points lt gt Insert ellipse To draw ellipses Insert filled ellipse To draw filled ellipses E Insert polygon To draw irregular polygons w Insert polyline To draw polylines Insert filled regular To draw filled regular polygons polygon polygon feature 2015 gvSIG Page 191 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG lasociaci n y Insert regular To draw regular polygons polyline feature polygon a Insert filled To draw filled recta
233. lection press Enter 27 5 Move geometry To move the selected geometries between two specified points This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To end the selection press Enter 2 First point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting First point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 3 Second point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Second point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 2015 gvSIG Page 183 of 371 ee OO lll gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG lasociaci n 27 6 Rotate geometry To rotate the selected geometries one specified angle This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To end the selection press Enter 2 Rotation centre You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specif
234. licate layers O Remove duplicate labels O Place one label per feature Place one label per feature part e Orientation To choose from horizontal parallel following the line or perpendicular to this e Position To show label above below or on the line e Location Dropdown for selecting the location at the beginning middle or the end of the line depending on the scanning direction e Repeated labels To choose between Place one label per feature or Place one label per feature part multigeometries or Remove duplicate labels which will place a label by entity and if this is repeated it will only show one For polygon layer the interface is 2015 gvSIG Page 130 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide f Placement properties Polygon settings 2 Always horizontal O Always straight _ Fit inside polygon Duplicate layers O Remove duplicate labels O Place one label per feature 2 Place one label per feature part e Polygon settings It allows horizontal labelling and under the orientation of the polygon also the option to put the text inside or not This last option is indicated for polygons with islands or U shaped polygons in which the label will be placed within the geometry and not in the middle gap e Repeated labels To choose between Place one label per feature or Place one label per feature part multigeometries or Remo
235. liding bar to select the range of values Right clicking in any part of the graph the context menu is shown 2015 gvSIG Page 214 of 371 gvSIG asociacion gvSIG 2 2 User guide C Properties Capy Save as Print oom In Zoom Out b Auto Range y Properties This will open the properties dialog of the graph where you can configure its characteristics There are three tabs in this window o Title Options to define the title of the histogram General Show Title Q Plot It has three tabs Two of them Domain axis and Range axis allow to define the caracteristics of the histogram s axes xY Plot Domain Axis Range Axis Appearance General i lr a dm pees 2 A Fant Lila IL a bt a a Paint Other Ticks Range Show tick labels Tick label font Dialog plain 12 Show tick marks The Apparence tab allows to define the border the background and the orientation of the histogram 2015 gvSIG Page 215 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n XY Plot Domain Axis Range Axis Appearance i General Outline stroke 2 ____ Select Outline paint Select Background paint a Y Select Orientation Ve
236. ll amp First It allows users to go to the first register of the attributes table Previous It allows users to go to the previous register e Next it allows users to go to the next register e Last It allows users to go to the last register on the attribute table e Save It allows users to save changes e Close It closes the attributes editor window O 2015 gvSIG Page 204 of 371 A a gvSIG asociacion gvSIG 2 2 User guide C 32 DERIVED GEOMETRIES 32 1 Introduction It allows to create polygonal or linear elements from a point layer From this layer the user can indicate elements which form a polygon or line and it can automatically create the new elements It is available in the menu Layer Derivative geometries or in the right button bar Menu Button bar Attribute editor Query ta Export to Export to anotation 4 Start editing Modity ES Show attributes table Derived geometries Properties The tool interface is the following one 2015 gvSIG Page 205 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide ra aii asociaci n g Begeer capa as NN ow xi Source layer Layer E Points Parcels point Output layer path Sd Type Surface Options Process type POINTS TO POLYGON e e Source layer It allows users to select the point layer they want to use This layer must be loaded in the View e Output layer It allows users to indicat
237. lows to change the relation between the zoom level of the floating window and the gvSIG view Also it allows to change the text colour of the RGB values as well as the colour red green of the central cross When the cursor is outside the view the content of the floating window appears black There can only be one analysis view open at any time in gvSIG The button Analysis view is re labelled as Close Analysis view when the analysis view is already open O 2015 gvSIG Page 223 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n 35 MULTISPECTRAL RASTER 35 1 Principal components The analysis of principal components is a multispectral transformation that wants to avoid the use of redundant information in the image s bands This technique allows to transform a series of bands into new variables called uncorrelated components which absorb part of the variability of the data in a subset of the initial bands The advantage of the use of this mechanism is that most of the information falls on the three first created bands which allows to keep most of the information with a drastic reduction of space It is available from the raster toolbar in Multispectral raster and in the geoprocessing toolbox This tool has two dialogue boxes The interface of the first dialogue box is the following one Principal Components E Layer bouldr tm lt lt s s s an Qu Ha Create file Open in m
238. m doesn t need to be the same to the data used in the view since gvSIG has reprojection options available The gvSIG Views uses the EPSG 4326 projection by default From the View Properties we can change the coordinate system of a View and make geographic transformations When you open the projection dialog box named New CRS from Coordinate Reference System it will display a list of coordinate systems used recently Type Recent T Recent CRSs Repository W606584 WG6S584 Pseudo Mercator EDSO UTMzanesoh ETRS89 UTMzone 30h Info CRS Cancel OK Using the dropdown Type you can access the rest of options that gvSIG provides to select a coordinate system EPSG CRS ESRI AU2000 and CRS user EPSG contains the official coordinate systems more used European Petroleum Survey Group or EPSG was a scientific organization linked to the european oil industry EPSG compiled and spread a set of EPSG geodetic parameters a widely used database containing ellipsoids datums coordinate systems map projections etc The roles performed by the EPSG previously were taken up by the International Association of Oil and Gas Producers Surveying and Positioning Committee OGP in 2005 This Spatial Reference Identifier system SRID English acronym is still know as EPSG Source Wikipedia 2015 gvSIG Page 46 of 371 ND Tre 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n Select the type
239. magnify the distance between them To access to the grid tools it should be a layer in editing mode This tool is available from the tab Show Grid Show Hide menu or with the key F7 Each time you run this tool it will change its state it is activated or deactivated depending on the previous state of the grid Men Project manager Alt P Console Ak 5 Toggle display grid F7 Toggle snapping to grid Fs Using the Show Grid Turn turn off snapping to the grid or by the key F9 tool it is possible to enable or disable snapping to the grid points Each time you run this tool it will change its state it is activated or deactivated depending on the previous state of the snapping 2015 gvSIG Page 201 of 371 Bu OO 7c_ EE gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide E cia 30 EDITING TOOLS 30 1 Introduction To redo or undo the editing commands These tools are available from the Edit menu and from the relevant command bar Menu Button bars EA undo redo history EF Enable snapping F3 Let s see all the options Icon Tool Shortkey Description Undo To undo the last action in edition g gt Redo To redo the last undone action in edition Undo Redo History Edition commands history It allows to undo or redo various edition orders in the same action 30 2 Undo Redo history Edition commands history It allows to undo or redo
240. me Streets ok From the View Properties window you can also rename the View With the Delete button from the project manager you can delete the selected Views With the Open button from the project manager you can open the selected Views 8 2 View properties You can open the View properties configuration window trough e An open View document in the View Properties menu e From the Project Manager and having the View selected click the Properties button Menu View document Button Project manager View New layer EY Add layer Alt o The configuration options from the View properties window are 2015 gvSIG Page 43 of 371 gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide General Snapping Mame Streets Creation date Oct16 2015 Owner tr nur iTi fi l ri A a S d a 4 Map units apa Measuring units Meters Area units Meters Background color ll Current Projection EPSG 4326 Set as application s default CRS Comments Apply e Name The View s name You can rename the View e Creation date Date created of the View e Creator this is optional to specify the creator of the View e Map units measures and areas dropdown box where you can choose the measure units for your work meters miles yards e B
241. mf file attached to the raster Each subsequent time that the image will be loaded in gvSIG with that transformation In addition the raster layer acquires the capacity to be moved rotated or transported by clicking and dragging to the right place on the View Transformation on View e Translation Mousing over the screen image the cursor changes to a hand This means you can move clicking and dragging on the raster view e Scaling Mousing over the edges of the screen image the mouse cursor will change Depending on the chosen edge cursor will one way or another If placed in the lower or upper edges the cursor will become a vertical arrow This means you can click and drag to scale the image only on one side Scaling at all times keep the proportions of the raster If we move the cursor around the side edges the cursor will become a horizontal arrow allowing now to scale sideways For corners the cursor appears as an oblique arrow e Rotation Mousing over the outer corners of the screen image the mouse cursor will change This appears as a circular arrow This means you can start to rotate the raster from the selected corner e Mousing over the outer side edges of the screen image will change the mouse cursor This appears as an arrow symbol X or Y depending if the mouse is in the horizontal or vertical edges respectively This indicates that we can begin to deform the raster direction of the X or Y 37 3 Asign projection Assigns au
242. micolon comma or any other symbol defined by the user O 2015 gvSIG Page 325 of 371 0 EE eee 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 60 SELECTION TOOLS 60 1 Introduction These tools are the ones for selecting a group of features in one table Some of the gvSIG tools only work with selected elements In the case of attribute tables of one layer the selection of vectorial elements can be made from the View or from the attribute table of the layer These tools are available from the Selection and its relevant button bar The tool Select by attributes is among the Table button bar Menu Button bar Selection 69 G8 Reverse gt Clear gt YY Select by attributes Disable move up Move up Let s see all the available tools Icon Tool Shortkey Description Clear To clear the selection sy Select by attributes To select features in function on one query by attributes ES Reverse Ito reverse the selection Disable move up To disable the move up option t Move up To move up the selected records in the table To add records to an existent selection the key ctrl must be pressed while selecting the records To remove one or more records press ctrl and click on them With the key Shift capital letters is possible to select consecutive records The selected records will be highlighted in yellow 2015 gvSIG Page 326 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 60 2 Selection
243. mpground l svq Campground 1 sel svq gvSIG Basic seme i 2015 gvSIG Page 158 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp lasociaci n 1 Clicking on Select images a new window appears where we can search and select the images to import 2 Listing of all the selected images to be imported to the symbol library 3 In Folder name for creating the symbols we will indicate the name of the new library It is possible to create subfolders If we want the symbols saved in one subfolder we use as the separator between the folder name and the subfolder folder name subfolder name Listing of installed libraries If the folder where we want to save the symbols is already in the list we just need to select it 4 Size by default of the symbols 5 Drop down menu for overwriting options 6 Clicking on Import all the selected symbols will be saved in the defined folder or subfolder with the wanted size A window will appear indicating that the import have been finished If we want to have a different symbol when we make a selection we can do it automatically during the import We only have to take into account the name of the images that will represent every symbol during the selection we have to add _sel to the symbol name 22 2 Create package symbols gvSIG allows to create packages for sharing symbol libraries with other users This tool is located in Tools Symbols Create package
244. mponents a list of options to change the visibility of 3D view components and to enable or disable animation of viewport synchronization 3 Cache path of current cache and a button to remove tile cache The general 3D preferences changes only affect new 3D views so if we want to apply the changes we have to close 3D views and create them again 55 2 3D View properties 3D Plugin has the next view properties 2015 gvSIG Page 307 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide l sociaci n e a pl a General Snapping 3D Spherical vertical exaggeration 1 0 I Flat vertical exaggeration 1 0 l Auto synchronize layers Auto synchronize viewport dl BERAN ee O E E E aa A E A A E A m y Show Blue Marbel layer I i y Show NASA Landsat i I gt 1 l Show default elevation I Cancel Apply OK Each 2D view has its own 3D view properties 3D View properties are divided into three groups 1 Vertical exaggeration vertical exaggerations of 3D views It is possible to change the vertical exaggeration from 3D view properties or from the pair of buttons at 3D view 2 Auto synchronized two options to enable or disable the auto synchronization of layer or viewport 3 Visibility of default layers three options to change the visibility of default loaded layers at 3D views 55 3 3D Layer properties 3D Plugin provides 3D layer properties to indicate several options Depending o
245. mport and delete colour tables The supported formats are rmf ggr and gpl When clicking on the button with the tooltip New library a dialog opens which prompts for basic information of the colour table New library Name New library a Interval size O Number of intervals 259 OK Cancel e Name Name of the new library e Minimum The default minimum value is O e Maximum The default maximum value is 255 2015 gvSIG Page 218 of 371 A Te Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n e The size and number of intervals The intervals can be specified by two different methods The first method is by assigning the interval size where we introduce the distance of an interval after which the number of intervals is calculated for the whole range of values The second method is to specify the number of intervals after which the distance of the intervals is calculated automatically 3 Preview It allows to visualize the results in real time of the changes which are being applied The Preview has the following options o To move on the image using the left button of the mouse o To center the layer in relation to the preview using the C key o To adjust the zoom level to see all the layer using the Space key o Predefined zoom levels using the 1 and 5 keys The 1 key is used for a zoom level 1 1 o To zoom in or out using the mouse wheel or with
246. n The button Save to save the new symbol It will be saved with the extension gvssym By default it will be saved in the Symbols folder which is the root of the symbol library list The user will have to save the symbol in the folder or subfolder chosen by the user The gvSIG basic installation has one single symbol library called gvSIG Basic It is possible to install more symbol libraries from the Addons manager 20 2 Editor Simple marker symbol Selecting the Symbol marker symbol the interface is 5 O Symbol property editor Preview Properties Type Simple marker symbol Units Pixels al An the world Simple marker Color Ll Size do X offset g E Y offset g E Marker style o Use outline Border color y Lo ah 96 tj OK Cancel In the left side there is the symbol preview and the list of the layers The selected layer is the one with the values showed in the right side color size Simple marker symbol options e Colour Marker colour It is possible to apply transparency e Size Marker size e Offset in X and Y To move the symbol in relation to the X axis and Y axis e Marker style To select between the available markers circle square cross e Use outline and border colour Enabling the space the marker will have the chosen colour It is possible to apply transparency 2015 gvSIG Page 140 of 371 ND
247. n OK and the information will be added to our Vista 11 9 Adding PostGIS Raster It allow to add raster information stored in PostGIS database Its behaviour is similar to GeoDB 1 Connect 2015 gvSIG 2 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide a File WMS WCS WES WMTS GeoDB OSM PostGIS Raster rConection selector A e 1 Select PostGIS Raster tab 2 Click on the button to create a new connection If there are connections already created we must select from the drop down When the connection is established the following window opens Connection parameters connectionname asig O O O Y Driver PostgreSQLExplorer Host qvsig training cam Port User Note that the user name and password must match case sensitive with that recorded in the data base Advanced Delete ok Cancel 3 We indicate the connection parameters o Connection name user s choice o Connector Select the PostgreSQLExplorer option from the dropdown o Server Server URL o Port o Database database name o User o Password 4 Click on OK and set connection When we connect the window Add Layer PostGIS Raster displays the avalable tables O 2015 gvSIG Page 80 of 371 Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n Conection selector gvsig Table selector tr relieve andalucia2 Subdataset Don t select anything to load all datasets public tr relieve andalucia
248. n the type of layer and loading mode selected some properties will be enabled or disabled 3D Vector layer properties Vector layers have two loading modes Rasterized vector mode and Elevation mode Rasterized vector mode converts vector layer to raster layer in order to show it at 3D view as raster Elevation mode converts vector layer to DEM Digital Elevation Model taking elevation values from indicated field not available yet lf Rasterized vector mode is selected vector layer will have the following properties 2015 gvSIG Page 308 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG L asociaci n 6 A RNR RRENEN REERERH g E General Symbols Labelling Hyperlink data 3D ESAS l Loading mode Rasterized vectorial i PA Tile configuration Level of details A A A A Zero level resolution Low Tile size Height Width Elevation Cancel _ Cancel Apply _ Apply OK 3D Vector layer properties are divided into five groups I 4 5 Loading mode it indicates that vector layer has to be loaded as a raster layer at 3D view Level of details minimum and maximum detail level of layer Minimum level of detail indicates at what level the layer will be visible For example if we indicate two to minimum level layer will be invisible at zero and one detail level Maximum level of detail indicates the maximum level of detail calculated For example if
249. ndow where we can select the reference system This window is similar to the one for selecting the reference system ina View See Coordinate system to get more information except the option to select a transformation When selecting a CRS for a layer different to the CRS for the View gvSIG automatically makes a reprojection of the layer Reprojection is on the fly OTF This means that the layer keeps its original projection without any change If we want to create a new layer with a different projection we will use the Reprojection geoprocess See Geoprocessing Transformation and conversions 2015 gvSIG Page 54 of 371 SIG 2 2 U id Es gvSIG gv 2 User guide y asociaci n According to the 19111 ISO there are two types of operations to relate two different CRSs conversion operations and transformation operation A coordinates conversion operation is applied when the CRS datum of the layer is the Same as the CRS datum of the View that is both CRS belong to the same geodesic reference system but they are in different coordinates systems In this case when choosing the layer CRS we must select the option No Transformation A coordinate transformation operation is applied when the CRS datum of the layer is not the same as the CRS datum of the View In this case there are two types of coordinates operations e That the operation just involve a transformation when the CRS coordinate system of the laye
250. ng characteristics defined by the user as well to the changes of the View The labels can not be modified by the user directly Labelling can be defined activate or deactivate from the Labelling tab in the Properties window of the layer To activate deactivate the labelling we have to enable disable the Enable labelling space Once the labelling had been defined even when is disabled the memory will keep the characteristics so the user will not need to define them each time the user wants to show the labels There are two different main types of labelling in gvSIG Label attributes defined by table It s a basic labelling and quick to set up User defined label It is subdivided into different types of labelling with multiple options for defining the different characteristics of labeling to apply 18 2 Basic labelling Label attributes defined by table The labelling can be defined quickly and based on the data of the attibute table The interface contains Enable labeling General Label attributes defined In table KEY i II i y Field to use in label NAME AA I Font i 1 Text height field scalerank il l Color i LAA l Fixed mo O 10 p1 El na A 1 60 Single color i Rotation field none x g HH 00 Units Pixels a Q_xq M O Color field scalerank zji Il Reference System_ _Inthe world 2 _ _ _ A A asss i 1 Dropdown with the tw
251. ngles polygon feature rectangle Ci Insert rectangle To draw rectangles polyline feature le Insert filled spline To draw filled spline curves polygon feature curve amp Insert spline curve To draw spline curves polyline feature eg Rectangular matrix To draw rectangular matrix of geometries Polar matrix of To draw polar matrix geometries Qu og 28 2 Insert point To draw points This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Insert point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Insert point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 28 3 Insertar multipoint To draw multipoints A multipoint is a serial of points working as a single features This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Insert points of one feature You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Indicate a new point that opens a window for entering the coordinates All the points inserted will belong to the same feature 2 Finish To finish the point insertion lt can be made pressing Enter or in the context menu selecting Finish 28 4 Insert line To draw lines indic
252. nnnnanonos 119 17 13 Multiple attributes Complex SYMDOL ccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeaeaes 119 15 LABELLING israel ie ia De 121 TS E APOC GTO Nereida aia 121 18 2 Basic labelling Label attributes defined by table ococcoccoccoccnnco 121 18 3 Advanced labelling Label features in the same WAY cococcccocononnnncnnons 122 18 4 Advanced labels Label only when feature is selected o cccccoccoccoco 123 A labelling Define classes of features and label each differently 18 6 Advanced labelling Define classes of features and label each differently LOSING DY SCA e E E EE cit 124 18 7 Advanced labelling Opciones COMUNeS sssesssessrrsrresrrerrrrrserrrrresene 124 19 RASTER LAYER PROPERTIES ccccccccncccnenececneeneeueneueuneuense 133 19 1 HAV OMI ON fain ircasvncre enina aros inna roe ANEETA ENNES ENNEN 133 OZ GN a OTE 133 2015 gvSIG Page 5 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 Es gvSIG User guide asociaci n IES A Ba a E E E E E A 134 Es nn PP o 135 tS ENA NC ro OE E E 136 20 EDITION AND SYMBOL MANAGEMENT cscccscscnenenenneuennes 138 ZO LS VMPOLDOWS Olesa amistat ceda 138 20 2 Editor Simple marker SYMDOI ccccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaeseeeneeneaneas 140 20 3 Editor Simple marker SYMDOI ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseegeeeeeaeeaneateaneas 141 20 4 Editor Simple line SYMDOI ccccccececeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeaeaeseeateeeneeneeneas 142 20 5 Editor Pic
253. nnnnnnnnnn 27 Dre INTO ACE ara ot ada 27 4 2 YDES Or doOcCUMEN Siesia aaa TE Tna 27 4 3 Vocabulary used in GVSIG ocococcccccoconoccocononononcononnncononnnanrnronannrnarnnnnanens 28 9 PROJEC Saa aii 29 Dela POO C OOI e E E E E ieaoda 29 5 2 Save project CNANGES ccceccecscecececeseseeeeseseeeeeeseseeeecegesteeeetsesneneaneaneass 29 5 3 Change reso rce folde soria aora Ei 30 6 PROJECT MANAGE Risso 32 SA a EE CS PPP AN 32 VIEWS 7 PREFERENCE Sisa tai 34 o e E ee er er ey re ree 34 7 2 DSCNS OOOPO K T II PU Oc n y A 35 o VIEW DOCUMEN Cissoriiiari AA A 43 Orto aS a VI riada 43 8 2 View pPTOPertIeS ococcccococcccononononcononanconononacnnnnnarnnronnnrarrrnnn nena rnnrnnrnannnnnnes 43 9 COORDINATE SYSTEM isaac ii een EEA 46 9 1 Change the View Coordinate SYSteM ccccececececeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeneeneaneas 46 9 2 Define a ISON S C Orea ua dit eta 47 9 3 Reprojecting a layY8T ocococcccoconononcnconononconononancnnononnnrononnrnrronarnnrnsrnnrnnnnnes 51 2015 gvSIG Page 3 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 Es gvSIG User guide amp lasociaci n LO VIEW INTERFACE iia 52 101e MEW Mtema CO naritatia dis diri irdc b ica 52 11 ADDING LAYER S coin 53 Lido INTO ducati ora 53 UEA LOGIN MS o E 54 A To ala AAA o PP PO A 58 11 4 Adding a WMTS oooocccccononcncononononcnnonanonrononnrnnronnnnnrnrrnrnnrnrrnnnenarnarnsrnannss 63 o AONE WES ura sa cabras 67 11 6 lo O Po E o PO 72 Vit Addin a OSM SIV IC rro idilio 75 11 8 Adding
254. nship between resolution and zero level of detail If we indicate zero level resolution to high layer will be shown with more resolution at zero detail level If we indicate zero level resolution to low layer will be shown with less resolution at zero detail level 4 Tile size it indicates size of tiles 5 Elevation elevation part only is available if elevation loading mode is selected If Elevation mode is selected vector layer will have the following properties 2015 gvSIG Page 311 of 371 2 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide Pr asociacion 5 Raster properties Bands Information Transparency Enhance General 3D Loading mode Elevation Tile configuration Level of details Mamun DOO SSS S S Zero level resolution Tile size Height Width Elevation Units Meters NoData 59999 0 When we select elevation model elevation group properties will be enable with other options to indicate 1 Units it indicates units of elevation values Two options meters and feet 2 NoData it indicates NoData value All points that have indicated NoData value will be transparent at 3D view O 2015 gvSIG Page 312 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 56 DOCUMENT TABLE 56 1 Table s properties gvSIG asociaci n C We can Access table s properties configuration window by In a document table opened in menu table properties From the Project manager with the table selected clicking on button
255. o labelling types Select Label attributes defined by table 2 Labelling parameters Field to use in label Dropdown that allows to choose the field in the attribute table of the layer which contains the values to be displayed as labels 2015 gvSIG Page 121 of 371 A 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n e Text height field Dropdown to select one field of the table that contains the height of each label e Fixed height To enter a fixed value for the label size e Rotation field Dropdown to select one field and its values will indicate the rotation angle for the labels The field must be integer The angles values must be within the interval 0 360 and will be applied clockwise e Units Dropdown to select the units for measuring the values of the text height If Pixels are selected the labels will not be scaled if the View zoom changes having the same size always e Reference system To select the units will be referred to the worl or to the paper 3 Font properties e Font To select the font type e Single colour To choose a colour for the labels It s possible to apply for transparency e Colour field Dropdown that allow to choose one of the attribute fields so their values are taken as the colour of the labels gvSIG uses decimal codes corresponding to 24 bits to represent colours from a table field When this is enabled many labels as possible will be created without ov
256. ociaci n CRS Usuario Datum Sistema de Coordenadas Nombre WGS84 C digo Datum Nombre del Datum WorldGeodeticsysteml984 mM Elipsoide Nombre del Elipsoide Sa F Definir por 2 a inv f Inverso del Apl 298 257223563 semieje Menor 35652 314245179 Meridiano Nombre del Me m User CRS Datum Coordinate system Coordinate system O Geographic 2D Projected Prayection Name SSS Parameter Central meridian Degree False easting i Meters False northing Meters O 2015 gvSIG Page 50 of 371 E gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n After defining the several parameters click the Finish button on the Coordinate system panel and the new user s CRS will be created 9 3 Reprojecting a layer When adding layers to a View with different CRS we have the option of reprojecting them To do this simply indicates the projection of the layer and if necessary a geographic transformation The window for reprojecting a layer is similar to the New CRS window adding the function of applying a geographic transformation For more information see the Add layer topic 2015 gvSIG Page 51 of 371 quee _ ee E gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n LOVIEW INTERFACE 10 1 View Interface The Views are the gvSIG document that constitute the main working area of the geographical information In a view you can display different layers of inform
257. of available layers in the WMTS server and to choose the one you want to add to the View 2015 gvSIG Page 65 of 371 ee Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n Information Layers Styles Dimensions Formats View type 2 View as layers list D Mew as themes Select raster layers i LIME C FAULT 3 NUM C GLEN _ GN 1 LEN 1 LF GLF Server Type OGC WMTS 1 We select the type of View view as a layer list or view as a theme 2 The list of the available layers is shown Double click on a layer and it will automatically be added 3 or click on Add 4 Name of the added layer 5 Click on Next 4 Styles It allows you to choose between the different types of styles Symbology that are available It can happen that there is only one defined style or that the tab is disabled 1 We choose the style 2 We click on Next 5 Formats Choosing the format coordinate system and text format 2015 gvSIG Page 66 of 371 NNN A 2 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n C Information Layers Styles Dimensions Formats Select formats Select SAS urn ogc def crs EPSG 6 19 3 3857 a Select text formats for Info by point a i m a L Sarver Type OGC WMTS Previous Next OK Cancel
258. of the algorithms executed in the current session and can be displayed at any time via the Jools Geoprocessing Results menu Graphical results can be saved as an image in png format and texts as html files To do this click on the right mouse button and select Save Item 2015 gvSIG Page 260 of 371 C gvSIG 2 2 User guide Es gvSIG asociaci n Parameters Output region Extent from Fit to input layers User defined Use extent from view Untitled 7 Use extent from layer A mdt25B Y Extent values Range X Range Y Number of rows cals In some of the geoprocesses the tab Output region allows to define the area of the output layer and if the output is a raster the size of the cell aimed for that output Also the button help is always available in the execution window with the help for that geoprocess The Output region can have the following options e Fit to input layers Automatic It is made by the geoprocess in function on the input data Those generating vector or raster outputs but not requiring any raster layer as input this option is not available e User defined It is possible to enter manually a group of coordinates or a cell size if it is a raster layer e Use extent from view It is possible to take the extension values of the output layer from any of the Views selecting it from a dropdown menu e Use extension from layer It is possible to take the extension v
259. of the remote services supported by gvSIG Formato Notas WMS Web Map Service v 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 3 0 WFS Web Feature Service v 1 0 0 1 1 0 WMTS Web Map Tile Service WCS Web Coverage Service v 1 0 0 1 1 0 WMC Web Map Context It allows to save the parameters of a WMS layer conection CS W Web Catalog Service v 0 9 0 2 0 0 2 0 1 2 0 2 Profiles ebRIM and ISO 19115 19139 Z39 50 Catalog SRW Catalog Z39 50 in web GAZ WFS G Gazetteer v 0 9 0 0 9 1 ADL Gazetteer Geonames Gazetteer OSM Open Street Map 2015 gvSIG Page 97 of 371 ND Te gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociacion 13 3 Database Informative table of the databases supported by gvSIG Formato Lectura Escritura Notas PostGIS vectorial Yes Yes PostGIS raster Yes Yes MySQL Yes Yes Oracle Spatial Locator connector Yes Yes Requires manual installation of the Oracle proprietary libraries in gvSIG to work Database connectors Generic Yes Yes 2015 gvSIG Page 98 of 371 Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n 14 TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC COMMON OPERATIONS WITH LAYERS 14 1 Introduction Table of Contents or TOC is the View area where the layers and its legends are listed In the TOC we can perform some of the most common operations with layers The TOC helps manage the display order of the layers and the assignment of symbols E v Mar MA 10m populated places o
260. ogy related to the emergency management The symbol library is based on the EMS The Emergency Mapping Symbology made by the Department of Natural Resources The linear and fill symbols are inspired by the document Biosecurity Emergency ad Management Mapping Symbology A 3 po Adultdaycare Aerodrometfaciliby Aerodromeheliport Aircraftsurfacearea i AR DO SS Airnavigationaid Bridge Busstation Chemicalfacility NME NNANMENN ANM NN Blackl Black Black3 Black4 BlackS Black 6 Bluel Blue BlueS Blue4 BlueS Blues Greenl Green Green3 Green4 Greens NNM ANN Green Redl Red Red3 Red4 RedS Reds ss SS At risk Control area Dangerous Free area Infected Negative Mot assessed Other area Quarantine area Resolved 21 7 Forestry This symbol library is based on the NPS U S National Park Service symbology and also based on Trees amp Shrubs made by Jim Mossman O de LAOS IL SOBO T amp Sl T510 TES11 T amp S12 T amp S13 T6514 TESIS 16516 T amp 517 16518 16519 TES5S2 TAREN TARE TESZ22 T amp S23 OIDO EOC ii 16524 T amp 525 T6526 T amp S2 T amp 528 T amp 529 TES3 T amp 530 TES31 T amp S32 T amp 533 T534 T amp S35 T amp S36 T amp S4 T amp SS P gr ki ENS F n n A n m Si E pa 4 ENEE Fe Planned Secondary Compartment Highlighted ME al Perennial Pipeline r A Ju y Fi Y Fa C a V F N Protect Railroad Railroad2 2015 gvSIG Pag
261. oject Point Save to temporary file 1 Input layer to reproject 2 Selected features Option to use only the selected features 3 Projection of destination Use to set the projection for the new layer 41 14 Spatial Join This geoprocess transfer attributes from a source layer to a target layer very similar to an alphanumerical join The difference with a traditional join is that the transfer criteria is not the value of one or many given attributes 2015 gvSIG Page 273 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide naaid asociaci n 9 gvSIG The interface is Input coverages provincias andalucia age Overlay layer ne 10m admin 0 countries 22222 r _ Selected features input layer _ Selected features overlay layer Lise the nearest Summary function Spatial Join vectorial Save to temporary file aiff 1 Input layer 2 3 Selected features Option to use only the selected features in both layers Geometrias seleccionadas Overlay layer When the geoprocess finishes the new layer will be included in the TOC 41 15 Union Like Intersect and Difference this geoprocess is an overlay geoprocess It works with an input and an overlay layer it is also called Spatial OR because features of the result layer will have features whose geometry is in any of the input or the overlay layer This means that the geoprocess takes three steps e The first one to calculate the intersection of bot
262. ol selector window will open 17 3 Categories Unique values Each record can be represented with a symbol according to the unique value adopted in a certain field in the attributes table Each element will be drawn depending on the attribute value indicated by the category For instance in a field of a uses map each use will have a specific colour Classification fleld clase x Color scheme _ Other values a Add all Add Remove all Remove symbol levels The interface contains 2015 gvSIG Page 107 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG lasociaci n 1 Classification field A drop down menu where you can select the field of the attributes layer which contains the data to carry out the classification 2 Color scheme Drop down menu where you can select a colour scheme for generating automatically the symbols 3 Other values If this is enabled all the values without a symbol for its value will be represented with a specific symbol If it s not active those elements will not be shown 4 To define the symbol the value and the label To modify the symbol double click on it A new window will open to access the screen dialogue Symbol selector Symbol Symbol Choose symbol Legend Label text that will appear in the TOC SNU Accept Double click on a concrete value to modify it The value is the one found in the attributes table Double click on
263. ommand 2 Filed List of the fields Double click on the field to add the expression 3 Type Depending on the selected type the available Commands are updated 4 Commands List of the available commands depending on the selected Type Double click on the expression to apply 5 Expression Operation which will be applied to the selected field It is possible to type it directly The Advanced tab is for using one expression saved in one file The interface Is General Advanced BE e A Load script with the expression 2015 gvSIG Page 330 of 371 NN A 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n e Save script with the expression e Run script to test the expression Some usual Commands are Command Description rec The O based index of the current record ToNumber Returns a new number initialized to the value represented by the Specified string ToString Returns the string representation of the numeric field area Returns the area of the polygon perimeter Calculates the perimeter of the polygon or the length of one line subString To make crops of one alphanumeric field Examples e Crop 7 last characters subString Field 0 length Field 7 e Delete the 3 first characters subString Field 3 length Field e Keep the last 5 characters and delete the rest subString Field length Field 5 length Field x Calculate X coordinate of one point y Ca
264. on function of the mapping of values is not linear In each type of nonlinear function for the output value will apply a function that corresponds to its name Logarithmic Nonlinear enhancement Exponential Nonlinear enhancement Split levels It is a special type of linear enhancement Divide the function of the straight in sections equidistant staggered This causes for input values between two existing points of the same horizontal level the same output value is assigned The effect on the image is color intervals with no transitions appear It can be changed the number of intervals existing with text entry labeled Levels 6 levels appear by default e Band Allows to define the band raster where acting on changes made in the chart For a proper rolling of the image it is common for there to vary the enhancement of each band separately and with different values e Drawed It allows selection of line and fill The color of the line or fill depends on the band you have selected e Type Select from the following O Standard Displaying the histogram normally For each possible pixel value in the X axis the number of pixels about that value assigned in the axis Y Cumulative For each possible pixel value in the X axis is assigned the number of pixels about that value on the Y axis In addition it is added to the number of pixels of the same or lower value than that position Logarithmic Assigns the logarithm of the histogram at
265. on to use only the selected features in both layers 41 11 Intersection This geoprocess works with two layers the input layer and the overlay layer For each geometry in the input layer it computes its intersections with the geometries of the overlay layer For each intersection it adds a new feature with the intersection as geometry and all attributes of the features which originates it It is called Spatial AND because features of the result layer models a space common to both layers 2015 gvSIG Page 270 of 371 A Te gvSIG C gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n The interface is rinputs Vector layer Input layer provincias andalucia Intersection cover provincias andalucia o o o o Options Selected features Input cower Selected features Intersection cover Outputs ARS n nen TSave ta temporary tel o Intersection_line vector Save to temporary file lu Fine inma EOE 1 Input layer 2 Intersection cover To select the intersection layer 3 Selected features Option to use only the selected features in both layers The type of the output layer will depend on the input layer e Between a polygon layer and a linear one the output layer will be polygonal e Between a polygon layer and a point one the output layer will be polygonal e Between two linear layers the output layer will be a point layer with the crosspoints
266. ontrols located below the table e Gradient view It contains the same information as the tabular view but presented in a different way and with the possibility to obtain results that are difficult to achieve with the tabular view The colour bar represents the range of values from minimum on the left to maximum on the right At the start the end and on intermediate points on the colour bar are a number of break points with a fixed colour value These break points indicate the colour that will be assigned to the value that falls on that point A click on a break point will activate the text boxes below the colour bar These text boxes show the following information about the selected point o Colour Colour selector which can be modified o Class Label associated with the point o Value Pixel value at this break point To add a break point just click below the colour bar After adding a break point you can modify its information To remove a break point you can click on it and drag it away 5 Controls of minimum and maximum values and the Recalc statistics button 6 In the lower part of the dialog are the controls of the tabular and gradient view e Interpolated When ticking this check box the transition between the colours of two ranges of pixel values will be smoother If you disable this check box the transition will be abrupt The point where a colour ends and the next one begins is defined with a rhombus symbol e Limits adj
267. oordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Select one vertex that opens a window for entering the coordinates 3 Move insert or delete vertex Once the vertex has been selected there these options available o Move Moving the mouse and clicking in the new position to move the selected vertex o Insert vertex Pressing on lt 2d o Delete vertex Pressing on 27 19 Copy features To copy selected features to the clipboard It allows to copy features between laers This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features to copy 2 Run Copy features 3 It will be given the option to copy as well the alphanumeric attributes along the graphic elements The features are copied in the clipboard and can be pasted in another layer which allows the same type of geometry than the original layer 27 20 Paste features Paste the features from the clipboard This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Put the layer where we want to paste the features in editing mode to paste the avallable features in the clipboard 2015 gvSIG Page 189 of 371 Le 2 gvSIG asociaci n e gvSIG 2 2 User guide 2 Run Paste features and the copied features will be pasted 27 21 Delete features To delete the se
268. ouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Insert point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 2 Finish To finish the spline curve joining the last vertex with the first one from the console command or with the context menu by selecting Finish 28 19 Insert spline curve To draw spline curves The spline curve is a linear feature This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Insert point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Insert point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 2 Finish spline There are two options o Finish To finish the spline from the console command or from the context menu selecting Finish o Close spline To close the spline by joining the last vertex and the first one from the console command or from the context menu selecting Close spline curve 28 20 Insert rectangular matrix To copy a feature a determined number of times with a rectangular matrix shape This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To
269. pen The created file is stored in the selected folder being a gvspkg file extension 76 7 Regenerate portable view from View You can access the Crear Vista portable window and modify the characteristics of the portable view Available from the menu Vista portable Regenerar Vista portable desde Vista 76 8 Portable view catalog Open the portable view available list and open one of them Access from the Gestor de proyecto Vista portable clicking on Nuevo button g Project LEE Ll p pppn p nnn a x Document types View Charts Portable View Portable View World Countries Mew A window displaying the available portable view list is open Selecting one of them you can see its characteristics Clicking on open portable view Abrir Vista portable and the selected portable view will be created 2015 gvSIG Page 367 of 371 A Ee gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide 77 MAP SHEETS INSTALLATION 2015 gvSIG Page 368 of 371 C gvSIG asociaci n C gvSIG 2 2 User guide 78 MAP SHEETS DOCUMENT 2015 gvSIG Page 369 of 371 EEE E9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp lasociaci n 79 DYSCHROMATOPSIA 1 1 Introduction Extension created for users that have problems in the perceptions of colors It allows to transform from a view with a predefined number of layers and legends these legends or create new ones in others that can
270. pixel in the image Threshold values from O to 255 Compare option Freichen Filter of Freichen Active Threshold Compare 2015 gvSIG Page 229 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide Median Mean Low pass O 2015 gvSIG 69 gvSIG asociaci n It weighs the neigboring pixels depending on the distance from the pixel that is being evaluated Because of this there are not privileged directions when detecting the borders Threshold values from 0 to 255 Compare option Funciones espaciales Spatial functions Filter of Median Active Window side PI It applies a kernel matrix in which you can select the dimension of its side using the scroll bar or the text box in Window side The obtained result is a smoothing of images and the elimination of noise it analizes the pixel matrix of N x N and the central pixel is replaced by the value of the median of all of them lts advantage is that the final pixel value is a real value and not an average Filter of Media Active Window side 3 It applies a kernel matrix in which you can select the dimension of its side using the pull down button in Window side It assigns the mean of all the pixels included in the window to the central pixel The matrix of filtering is compound by ones and the divider is the total number of elements in the matrix Filter of Low pass Active Window side 3 It applies a kernel matrix in wh
271. plex symbol To define different symbologies by scale ranges for one layer gvSIG will apply the legend depending on the scale visualization Defined ranges Jee Legend definition The process to create the legend by scale is 1 Ranges defined Click on to open a new window where the scale ranges can be defined 2 Define the scale ranges and legend type to apply The legend type will be selected from a dropdown menu with all the different types supported by gvSIG 2015 gvSIG Page 119 of 371 A Ts gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide a asociacion C O Define a range Without min scale Max scale 1 000 E Without max scale Legend type Graduated symbols 3 Click on Accept 4 The options for defining the selected legend will be created automatically in the panel area called Legend definition 5 Legend settings 6 Now it s possible to add a new legend by scale range clicking on again in the panel area called Ranges defined 7 Once the different legends have been defined by scale ranges click on Apply or Accept in the Layer properties window 2015 gvSIG Page 120 of 371 A Tee 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n 18 LABELLING 18 1 Introduction A label is the text which describes one or more attributes The labels are located over or close to the elements of one layer according to the labelli
272. png bmp svg To add it select the route path to the image clicking on Browse There is the option to set up the width and scale the image in X and Y 20 6 Editor Simple fill symbol Selecting Simple fill symbol the interface is Simple fill le Fill color 5 00 Use outline Outline LO Outline opacity Border width 1 00 E It is possible to select the fill colour of the polygon and its outline opacity Clicking on the button showing the border the Symbol selector for lines is open to set up the outline There is the option to set up the width and the outline opacity 20 7 Editor Picture fill symbol Selecting Picture fill symbol the interface with two tabs is 2015 gvSIG Page 145 of 371 mtm O gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide Preview Properties Type Picture fill symbol Units Inthe world Picture fill Fill properties Picture file home alvaro qvs IG plugins org qvsig app mainplugin Syml Selection picture file home alvaro qvSIG plugins org qvsig app mainplugin Syml Fill color ans O Scalex 9 0000 F Scaler 9 0000 O0 1 00 Use outline Outline CEEE To fill the polygon with one image It is possible to modify the angle and scale it in X and ii t It allows to choose the fill colour and transparency These images can be outlined with different lines The tab Fill prope
273. r 2 40 BA AIA A E OO 4 Name New model roup Models E Flow accumulation dp Vector layer de Raster layer ar Raster band de 3D Raster layer dP Numerical value e String 26 Boolean value Fields amp tables e dP Field p Table aP Fixed table af File or folder a Point coordinates dp Multiple input ap Choice ee ee ee ee a ee ee 1 Working canvas where the structure of the model and the workflow it represents are shown On the left part of the window a panel with two tabs can be used to add new elements to the model 2 Elements Double clicking on any of them or clicking on Add a window with its properties willl be shown and it will be added to the canvas Two tabs have all the available elements to be added to the model e Inputs Available elements to be added e Procedures All the available algorithms 3 To define the name and group of the algorithm 2015 gvSIG Page 283 of 371 A Te gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n 4 Modeler tools e File To create a new canvas open an existent one and save as The extension will be model e Edit To edit an element of the model e Remove To remove an element of the model e Use grid To view and set a grid e Zoom buttons for the view of the canvas Creating a model is a two step process e Definition of necessary inputs These inputs will be added to the parameters window so the user c
274. r instance if the hyperlink is a JPG image here JPG can be indicated If the extension is indicated in the attribute table the space should be empty the extension only has to be used when the resource path has been indicated without the extension e Action Drop down menu with all the available hyperlinks supported by gvSIG When the hyperlink tool is used gvSIG will open a new window with the selected link type Those supported links are o Image files jpg png bmp o PDF files o SVG files o Text files and HTML 16 3 Metadata It allows to consult the metadata of one layer At the moment only the name and the CRS of the layer Metadata Layer of Layer name ne 10m populated places CRS EPSG 4326 2015 gvSIG Page 105 of 371 A Ee gvSIG 2 2 User guide 9 gvsic asociaci n 17 VECTOR SYMBOLOGY 17 1 Introduction The symbology is one of the most important properties of one layer In gvSIG a great variety of options are available for representing layers with symbols graphs and colours The symbols are assigned to each element depending on its attribute values and the selected symbology type By default when a layer is added into the View will be in one random colour all the elements of the layer with the same symbol To modify the symbology access to the Properties window and select Symbols On the left part you can see all the available legends for representing data in gvS
275. r is the same as the CRS coordinate system of the View in both CRSs the position is expressed in the same coordinates system but in a different datum e That a transformation and a conversion are made because neither the datum neither the coordinates system of the CRS of the layer and of the View are the same If a transformation operation is needed we must choose the type of transformation in the CRS selection panel of the layer and click the Next button accessing to a panel where we choose the corresponding transformation Select Tansformation No transformation No transformation Recent Transformations EPSG Transformation Manual Transformation Compound Transformation Grid NTv2 The transformation dialog depends on the type of transformation we want to apply EPSG Official transformation operations with 7 parameters defined in the Transformation repository EPSG In the dialog of this type of transformation there is a table which includes all the applicable transformations of the EPSG taking as source CRS the one which was chosen for the layer and the CRS of the View as destination CRS You must take into account that the transformation operations of this type are always between the base CRS that is non projected CRS and therefore if the CRS of the view or the CRS of the layer is projected the corresponding base CRS will appear in the fields Source CRS and Destination CRS Keep also in mind that for this type of t
276. r to discriminate specific crops and crops with other plant surfaces using the spectral ranges of the multitemporal Landsat images It is avallable from the raster toolbar in Multispectral raster and in the geoprocessing toolbox The interface is the following one Tasseled Ca E Layer bouldr tm KK an Pd Options 2 Landsat MS Ch Landsat TM O Landsat ETM Create file 2 Open in memory Name of the layer NewLayer_2 Use regions of interest of the layer Accept Cancel e Bands List of the raster bands e Options It allows to select the type of image LandSat MSS LandSat TM and LandSat ETM In the case of MSS it is just allowed images with 4 bands In the case of LandSat TM and ETM it is just allowed images with 6 or 7 bands e Output options The result of the operation can be loaded in a temporary layer Open in memory or in the file you specify Create file The result of the transformation generates a double type image with four bands for the MSS sensor three bands for the TM sensor and six bands for the ETM sensor 2015 gvSIG Page 226 of 371 A Cs gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 36 ENHANCEMENT 36 1 RGB Filters It allows users to apply digital filters like border detection or softened to apply masks and basic enhancements It is available from the Layer menu from the raster toolbar in Enhancement and in the geoprocessing toolbox
277. r using the autoextent command gt autoextent true false By default it has a true value However iif you want to set a concrete extent and cell size for all the output raster layers you should use the extent command 2015 gvSIG Page 294 of 371 A gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide Usage extent raster layer string extent vector layer string cellsize double extent x min double y min double x max double y max double cell size double Type autoextent to use automatic extent fitting when possible When a fixed extension has been set automatically the autoextent will be deactivated similar to execute a false autoextent 2015 gvSIG Page 295 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide se ald asociacion l gvSIG 49 BATCH PROCESSING 49 1 Introduction Run Batch process files Batch process project layers Set rendering style of output layers Expand all Collapse all Show active only Show help 49 2 Parameters table Estas tareas se realizan en una tabla como la mostrada en la siguiente figura s Batch processing SLOPE Parameters Output region Elevation Method Maximum slope Travis et al Radians Maximum slope Travis et al Radians Add row Delete row Help Open Save OK Cancel 2015 gvSIG Page 296 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide a asociaci n e Cada l nea de la tabla represent
278. ransformation the CRS for the View and the CRS for the layer must come from the same EPSG repository If they come from different repositories the table will appear empty 2015 gvSIG Page 55 of 371 Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n EPSG transformation Transformations d Transformation name Transform Description of the area EDSO to WGS 84 38 transform 4326 Israel and Palestine Te EDSO to WGS 84 37 transform 4326 Jordan EDSO to WGS 84 1 transform 4326 Austria Belgium Denm EDSO to WGS 84 2 transform 4326 Austria Denmark Fran EDSO to WGS 84 3 transform 4326 Iraq Israel Jordan Leb 5 EDSO to WGS 84 4 transform 4326 Cyprus onshore and EDS0 to WGS 84 5 transform 4326 Egypt Western Desert EDSO to WGS 84 6 transform 4326 Channel islands onsh 3 ED50 to WGS 84 7 transform 4326 Finland and Norway 0 EDS to WGS 84 8 transform 4326 Greece onshore EDS0 to WGS 84 10 transform 4326 Italy Sardinia onshore Manual It allows users to define a Helmert transformation through the Transformation introduction of its 7 parameters X traslation meters Oo 1000 0 1000 0 traslation meters Oo 2000 0 1000 9 Z traslation meters o 1000 0 1000 9 X rotation sexa sec Oo 60 0 60 0 Y rotation sexa sec Oo C600 60 0 Z rotation sexa sec o 60 0 60 0 scale factor ppm E 20 0 20 0
279. ransformations bar buttons and from the geoprocessing toolbox The interface is as follows g RT x source A mdt25B resource projection Current Projection EPSG 25830 ii target projection Current Projection EPSG 4326 Interpolation 2 No Yes Options Pixel size 2 6534567700331615E 4 Width 679 Height O Create file 2 Open in memory Mame of the layer NewLayer_l Accept Cancel e Source Source layer e Source projection CRS of the view where the source raster is loaded e Target projection Select the CRS target Go to CRS and Transformation window Interpolation e Options Allows to define the pixel size e Output layer Allows to select between generating a file on disk or in memory 2015 gvSIG Page 238 of 371 eee A 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide L asociaci n By clicking Accept the reprojection process finally asked if we want to load the raster redesigned in a View When performing a raster reprojection the available transformation is EPSG Transformation 37 2 Geolocalization It allows application of an affine transformation to an image translation rotation and tilt manually it is without control points so we will not have achieved accuracy information Available from the Layer menu and the geographic transformations button bar This tool is an option when georeferencing is for presentation purposes and do not need too much precision As in the geore
280. referenced e Output file Allowes to put path and destination file name in case that the georeferencing is done with resampling This option can vary from dialog options georeferencing environment so it is not necessary to put a proper value at this time although we will have to do it before the end of the process e Georeferencing algorithm Select the way the output result will be obtained There are two options o Affine transformation Applies an affine transformation to calculations based on the control points taken The output image is the same as the input The result of this transformation is a Georeferencing file rmf format Keep in mind that this type of transformation is limited and the user will be in charge of selecting the transformation more appropriate in each case o Polynomial transformation Involves a resampling of the input image taking into account the checkpoints as a reference and obtained an output image with the necesary deformations to adapt it to the new geographical location If this option is selected we will be forced to decide the degree of processing and the type of interpolation to be used to calculate new pixels There are three types of interpolation nearest neighborhood bilinear and inverse distance 2015 gvSIG Page 241 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide er asociacion Depending on whether one degree or another is chosen will need a minimum number of control points The number of points requ
281. rimary key Select a field to use as primary key O Don t create a primary key 4 Primary Key It allows us to select between the different options to define the primary key Once this is set click on the Next button Creation of spatials index Sila tabla contiene columnas de tipo geometria es recomendable que cree un indice espacial sobre ellas Create a spatial index in the geometry columns 5 Creation of spatial index It creates a spatial index for geometry type fields Once this is set click on the Next button O 2015 gvSIG Page 90 of 371 O gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide Check geometries before export o Validation of the geometry information Don t check the geometries O Check if the geometry is corrupt When the geoemtry is corrupt Set geometry to null O Check the if the geometry if valid When the geometry is not valid Try to repair the geometry Set geometry to null 6 Check the geometry before exporting It allows the selection among different options to perform a validation of geometric information Once this is set click on the Next button Permissions Puede indicar permisos que desea se asignen a la tabla una vez creada Marque que privilegios desea le sean asignados e indique para cada uno que per usuario o grupo desea que tenga ese privilegio Puede indicar mas de un perf separandolos por comas Select _ Insert
282. rmined scale range To set the viewing scale range 1 In Scale range click on Don t show the layer when the scale 2 Indicate maximum and minimum values for the scale With the denominator is enough The greatest numbers are referred to smaller map scales To be over 1 is the greatest scale aimed which are the smallest numbers of the map scale maximum scale To be under 1 is the smallest scale aimed in the active layer in the view minimum scale Once the scale range Is defined the layer will not be drawn if the View scale is out of the visible scale range of the layer 16 2 Hyperlink It allows to enable disable and set the hyperlink of one layer A hyperlink is a link with other resource image website and it s associated with one element of the layer 2015 gvSIG Page 104 of 371 NN TT 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n Enable hyperlink Actions Add action Remove action Field NAMEALT Extension Action Link to PDF files One layer can have different hyperlink s actions To add or delete one action the buttons Add action or Remove action are used The configuration settings of each hyperlink action are e Field Select the field in the attribute table of the layer containing the hyperlink path to the resource A drop down menu appears with all the available fields e Extension to define the resource extension Fo
283. rouped in the TOC To undo a grouping select the Ungroup layers option from the context menu 14 10 Rename a layer 1 Activate the layer that we want to to rename 2 We click on it with the right mouse button in the context menu and select Rename 3 A new window showing the new layer name is displayed 4 Press OK and the layer will be displayed with its new name in the TOC 2015 gvSIG Page 101 of 371 2 gvSIG asociaci n C The name change is at a visual level in TOC The file name does not change in any case gvSIG 2 2 User guide 2015 gvSIG Page 102 of 371 Le l ee Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 15 LAYER PROPERTIES 15 1 Introduction The layer properties are those characteristics that define the layer Most layer properties can be modified by the user The vector and raster layers have different properties In both cases to access the Properties window click with the right mouse button on the layer in the TOC and select the command Properties for vector layers and Raster Properties for raster layers Access to a vector layer Rename Properties Attributes table Properties Zoom to layer Delete layer Access to a raster layer Raster properties Properties Histogram Area of interest Generate overviews Panama Vector layer properties dy Layer properties oe eee eee Raster layer properties E Raster Properties
284. rs E Icon theme a Fill Alpha Ae Language ne i Screen settings 5 Skin m r Default fill color Fil m EN Alpha 10 Random Web Browser Map Symbol folder E Memory ihome akwaro gvsSlG plugins or ig app mainplugin Browse Modos de notificacion alli cli Meal sa S r Default font Sansserf y oo SansSerif EME Raster Jews Snapping 7 MEW CRS 2015 gvSIG Page 34 of 371 O gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n 9 gvsic Installation of some supplements can add new setting options Restore defaults eliminate changes that have been configured and restore the default settings of the Preferences window 7 2 Settings Here are the different preferences that can be configured in gvSIG Anotations It shows an options list that allow you to configure the format of the annotation layers Font type Arial Font style Plain 7 R Font color Export to Sets the formats that appear when launching the Export to from Layer menu tool Enable or disable export to formats KML format DBF format DXF format DataBase throws JDBC format Shape format Appearence It lets you modify the appearence of gvSIG It requires a restart for changes take effect 2015 gvSIG Page 35 of 371 ND i i De gvSIG 2 2 User guide
285. rtical o Other It allows users to define the rest of the visual caracteristics of the histogram General Draw anti aliased Background paint 1 Select series Paint yli Series Stroke Series Outline Paint Series Outline Stroke Save as To save the graph as an image with png format Print It allows to print the graph Zoom in To zoom in on one or both of the axes Zoom out To zoom out on one or both of the axes Auto Range It adjusts the zoom automatically to the window size for one axis or for both 5 Table It shows the statistics that correspond to the selected range of pixel values Each row of the table corresponds to one raster band as displayed in the histogram The columns that are shown are Minimum Minimum pixel value for the selected interval Maximum Maximum pixel value for the selected interval Mean The mean average of all the pixel values for the selected interval in the histogram Median Median pixel value for this interval Number of pixels The number of pixels included in the selected interval 6 Create table It allows users to create a data table in dbf format with the histogram values The table is atomatically added to gvSIG 7 Hide statistics It reduces the window s size hidding the options related with the statistics 2015 gvSIG Page 216 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp lasociaci n The Raster section of the Preferences in gvSIG
286. rties is to set up the fill depending on the offset in X and Y and the separation in X e Y of the image Picture fill Fill properties Offset 2015 gvSIG Page 146 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 20 8 Editor Marker fill symbol Selecting Marker fill symbol the interface with two tabs is Properties Type Marker fill symbol Units Pixels in the world Marker fill Fill properties Calor pao Choose marker a Grid Random Use outline Outline Outline opacity Mn Border width O E It is possible to give a fill with different marker types dot images with their properties The fill can be placed as grid as randomly The tab Fill properties is to set up the fill depending on the offset in X and Y and the separation in X e Y of the image Marker fill Fill properties Offset X 101 Y 10 5 Separation x 20H Y 2012 O 2015 gvSIG Page 147 of 371 9 gvsic gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n 21 SYMBOL LIBRARIES 21 1 AIGA AIGA is the American Institute of Graphic Arts acronym AIGA is known by its activities in graphic design specially in the pictograms for the American Department of Transport in 1979 The library is based on this pictogram group The symbols for lines and fills are inspired on the colour palette of the document Thinking inside the box AIGA identity and branding guidelines
287. ry contains coordinates that integrate a geometry set it visible can slow down the operation of the table Name Name of the field Not modifiable Alias Allow set an alias to a field With double click on a cell we can change it s alias Type Indicates field s type boolean date integer double string Not modifiable Size Number of characters allowed Not modifiable Precision Number of decimals to numerical fields Not modifiable Pattern Format of numerical data visualization With double click on a cell we can chnage the format 2015 gvSIG Page 314 of 371 ND EE C gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide ra uii asociaci n 57 TABLE S INTERFACE 57 1 Table s interface Tables are gvSIG s documents that contain alphanumeric information Tables are composed of lines or records representing each database element and columns or fields that define different attributes of each element All lines have the same columns Each field can store a specific type of data like number text or a date Intersection of a record and a field is a cell When a table is opened from projects manager is shown a new window divided in this components mince seen senna A ATA ts n miun estanca A e or eo EEEn EES Seer fe Ee hsline _ A E e FNODE r TNODE a LPOLY e RPOLY LENGTH HSLINE TT ID a ea HSLNvE 3 1 2 449 449 0 172 1 3 l s E 3 2 4 449 449 3 125 2 449 0 659 3 0 080
288. rySBoundary6Boundary7 Linel Line Line3 Lined N Line ERS EEE Aiga 01 Aiga 02 Aiga 03 Aiga 04 Aiga 05 Aiga 06 Aiga 07 Aiga 08 Aiga 09 Aiga 10 Aiga 11 Aiga 12 Aiga 13 Aiga 14 Aiga 15 Aiga 16 Aiga 17 Aiga 18 Aiga 19 Aiga 20 Aiga 21 Aiga 22 Aiga 23 Aiga 24 21 3 Colours Symbology with colour palettes for quantitative data The symbol library is based on the colour palettes of Colour Brewer Colour Advice for Maps O O O O O O O O O E O O Pastel 1 Pastel 2 Pastel 3 Pastel 4 Pastel 5 Pastel 6 Pastel Y Pastel 8 Pastel 9 Pastel 1OPastel 11Pastel 12Pastel 13 O E L L o O O O O O D O Pastel 14Pastel 15Pastel l6Pastel 17 Set 1 Set 2 Set_3 Set 4 Set 5 Set_6 Set 7 Set 8 Set 9 NNNNNNNN N Dark 1 Dark2 Dark3 Dark4 Dark5 Dark 6 Dark_ Dark 8 Pastel LlPastel L2Pastel L3Pastel L4Pastel L5Pastel L6 NNNNNVNNN Pastel L7Pastel L8Pastel L9 Set Ll SetL2 Setl3 Setl4 Setl5 Setl6 Setl7 Setlg8 Set_L9 S ES Accent 1 Accent 2 Accent 3 Accent4 Accent5 Accent_6 Accent 7 Accent 8 Blues 1 Blues 2 Blues 3 mT fT cd ee Blues 4 Blues 5 Blues 6 Blues 7 Blues amp Blues 9 BrBG_1 BrBG 2 BrBG 3 BrBG 4 BrBG_5 21 4 Commerce Symbology for commercial activities The symbol library is based on the symbols of E commerce Business Icons of Design Contest GIS GPS MAP Icons of Icons Land Bag And Boxes Icons of Babasse and Vista Artistic Icons of Lokas Software 2015 gvSIG Page
289. s editor area in the list of dimensions The controls in the bottom right hand corner of the tab are enabled 2 Use the slider control to move through the list of values the server has defined for the selected dimension You can move back to the beginning one step 2015 gvSIG Page 61 of 371 O 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n back one step forward or move to the end of the list using the navigation buttons which are located below the slider control 3 If you know the position of the value you require you can simply write it in the text field and it will move automatically to this value 4 Click on Add so that you can write the selected value in the text field and request it to the server gvSIG allows you to choose between o Single value Only one value is selected o Multiple The values will be added to the list in the order they are selected In o Interval An initial value and then an end value are selected 5 When the expression for your dimension is complete click on Set and the expression will appear in the information panel Although each layer can define its own dimensions only one choice of value is permitted single multiple or interval for each variable The server may come into conflict with the layer combination and the variable value you have chosen Some of the layers you have chosen may not support your selected value If this occurs a server error message will appe
290. s not selected it is considered that the value range is supported by a data type byte between 127 and 128 this produces significant differences in viewing and the minimum maximum range that appears at the bottom of the graph of entry 1 Enhancement options Enhancements replace each input data value by an output value This substitution make doing a correspondence between the data in the input range to output range To apply this correspondence that uses a function e Operation Dropdown for selecting the function enhancement o Linear Linear enhancements apply a correspondence between the input and output data in a linear manner In the simplest case a straight line maps each value in the input range with its respective output completely 2015 gvSIG Page 235 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide Es gvSIG P asociaci n equidistant That is if we have an output range between 0 and 255 and the input data are between O and 1 then the input data 0 5 corresponds to an output of 127 5 This behavior can be varied by inserting breakpoints of the graph The effect is that the linear filter is divided into sections with different inclination This causes for a stretch between two breakpoints is a linear function of assigning values defined by the slope of the line in that stretch Square root Nonlinear enhancements have the same principle as linear replace each input data value by an output value The difference is that the allocati
291. s that were in edit mode before trying to close the project The Select all and Clear selection buttons allow to enable and disable the check boxes The available options are e Ok saves the changes of the elements that are activated e Discard changes no changes are saved regardless of whether or not the elements activated e Cancel closes the window and return to the workshop 5 3 Change resource folder gvSIG stores the paths of the various data sources used in the project It may be happen that some of the routes to a particular data source has been modified since last session For example you may have changed the name of a folder where one of the layers used was located In this case gvSIG warns that this problem exists s File not found File not found ruido shp Do you want to locate the file ves Jm 2015 gvSIG Page 30 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide ais asociaci n C If select Yes it will be displayed in a new window that allow you to locate the current location of the file If No is selected the project is opened whether to display information on the layer not found dont_find_the file home alvaro Escritorio Beni2 00_ nuevas constru shp manzanas shp Mascara shp E ruido shp File Names Files of Type shp Once selected the project will open accessing the layer information from its new location 2015 gvSIG Page 31 of 3
292. search for a particular extension by entering a string text and pressing the Search button As results it will show only those algorithms that include the word or phrase entered To show all the algorithms again simply do a search with an empty string 2 Accessing to geoprocessing help 3 Allows access to the configuration of the toolbox To run a geoprocess must double click the name of it or click on it with the right mouse button and select Run from the contextual menu that appears When you run a geoprocess a new dialog box that varies according to the geoprocess is running will open but the interface remains with several common characteristics 2015 gvSIG Page 258 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n clip Parameters Output region Inputs Vector layer Input layer hidro andalucia Clip cover provincias andalucia Options Selected features Input cover Selected features Clip cover Outputs Clip_polygon vector Save to temporary file ail Clip_line vector Save to temporary file P Clip_point vector Save to temporary file OK Cancel if On the one hand we find a main tab called Parameters in which the input and output values must be entered for the geoprocess would be executed properly The number of parameters depend on the geoprocess and its requirements but the structure is similar in all the cases e One raster layer to select from all t
293. statistics e Image processing e Indices and other hydrological parameters e localiza e Local statistics e Location allocation e Non spatial e Pattern analysis e Profiles e Raster categories analysis e Raster creation tools e Rasterization and interopolation 2015 gvSIG Page 281 of 371 ue as 2 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide C asociaci n e Raster layer analysis e Reclassify raster layers e Statistical methods e Table tools e TIN e Tools for line layers e Tools for point layers e Tools for polygon layers e Tools for vector layers e Topology e Vectorization e Vegetation indices e Visibility and lighting O 2015 gvSIG Page 282 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n 47 MODELER 47 1 Introduction The modeler allows to create complex models using a simple and easy to use interface When working with a GIS most analysis operations are not isolated but part of a chain of operations instead Using the graphical modeler that chain of processes can be wrapped into a single process so it is easier and more convenient to execute than a single process later on a different set on inputs No matter how many steps and different algorithms it involves a model is executed as a single algorithm thus saving time and effort specially for larger models It is available from Tools Geoprocessing Modeler and from Models Tools Create new model The interface is G Modele
294. t datum e File data stored in files shp dxf tiff asc e Acces services to remote data according to OGC WMS WCS WFS WMTS standards e GeoDB Vectorial data in spatial databases 2015 gvSIG Page 53 of 371 mm A C gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide ita asociaci n e OSM Access services to OpenStreetMap images tiles e PostGIS Raster Raster data stored in a PostGIS database 11 2 Adding a file In the File tab if we click on Add a new window appears In here we can search the file we want to add Once the file is added it appears a list where the file name is indicated and its CRS By default gvSIG interprets that the CRS is the same as the View To modify the CRS the layer must be selected in the list and we click on Properties A new window is opened where there are two tabs Basic y Advanced Between all the properties available the most used is CRS Once we defined the CRS clicking on OK the layers will be added to the View x T p a a Lore ne 10m populated places shp CRS unknown Assumed EPSG 4326 File WMS WCS WFS WMTS GeoDB OSM PostGIS Raster x Store the parameters need to open a shp file Advanced Basic Encoding Default usedbflanguage s i shpFile JEarth 10m populated places ne 10m _populated places SMP a Accept Cancel Clicking the button of CRS we will be able to access to a wi
295. t with A target feature is selected if the intersection of geometry to the source entity is not empty but the intersection of their interiors is empty Cross over Selects features crossing the limits of the source features The boundaries of the source and destination features must share at least one side vertex or node Contain The geometry of the source entity should be within the geometry of the target layer including its boundaries Contained in Select the entities that are within the geometry of the source entities Over Select the features that overlap with the geometries of the source entities 2 Selected features of the layer Selects by a drop down list the selected layer selected of the source features 3 Selection Options New set Create a new selection Add to set Create a selection considering the already existing query and Summing the result of the current query to it Select from set Create a selection only from the already selected features If we want to use all elements of a layer as the source entities we must previously select all the elements of that layers 2015 gvSIG Page 176 of 371 LL gvSIG 2 2 User guide gvSIG asociaci n C 25 4 Select by attributes It makes user able to select features by using an attributes query This is its user interface Fields List of attribute fields in the layer Double click on the field to add it in Logical operators Inserts by cl
296. te Brightness o Activate Remove edges Clipping tail Contrast z o Any changes in this panel will be applied to the display and will never be aimed at generating a new layer If we want that the enhancement must apply from the bar raster tools Enhance On the left side of the dialog appear the controls to adjust the brightness and contrast By defaul they must appear disabled and if we begin to manipulate we have to select the check box Enable The right side applies to the linear enhancement This is a simplification of linear radiometric enhancement to monitor the display of images with different data byte types By default this enhancement controls are deactivated unless the image would be of a different data byte type in that case it is automatically assigned when the raster is loaded It is reccomended only to use this interface to automatically vary the values assigned If you want to assign an enhancement and have more flexibility in the implementation it is more appropriate to use the functionality Enhancements Radiation This enhancement assigns data input range to a range between O and 255 for display Delete ends option does not take into account the most extreme data values maximum and minimum of those in the raster The Cut queue sorts the image data from low to high values Then apply the percentage indicated on the right and the left Those who remain on the outside of the percentag
297. ted randomly in each area and will not be real ubications This legend is only for polygon layers The interface Is 2015 gvSIG Page 110 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide le asociacion E gvSIG Labeling field POP_EST Densities Medium ee Dot sre Dot value Background color Outline 1 Labelling field Drop down menu to choose the numeric field to make up the legend 2 Dot size To define the size of the point 3 Dot value this is the numeric value which will be given to each point It can be set up with numbers or with the buttons 4 Options to define the symbology Colour Dot colour Background colour For the polygons in the background Outline For defining the outline in the background polygons 17 6 Quantities Intervals This legend represents the elements of one layer using a range of colours Within that value range all the elements will have the same colour The intervals or graduated symbols are used for representing quantitative data with a progression population temperature The interface Is O 2015 gvSIG Page 111 of 371 qe as gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n Color ramp interval type Natural intervals Nr of intervals pEnd color a ia i othervalues m See symbol Value Label NN 99 0 1 8879301E7 99 18 879 301 MN 2 01 78485E67 5 86925445 20 178 485 68 692 542 MN 7 6805524E7 1 76242 76 905 524 176 242
298. terface will guide us through the export process KML options KML version KML 2 1 Show attributes in balloon 1 At first we must define the kml options version whether we want to show atributtes in balloons and to use labels Once those fields are set click on the Next button 2015 gvSIG Page 87 of 371 gvSIG asociacion gvSIG 2 2 User guide Select file i 2 We must select the name and file location of the new layer Once those fields are set click on the Next button Export options Select the records to export 2 All records O Only selected records CO Filtered records GML Shape Expression name optional DXF l GML L Expression lt Back Next Export Cancel 3 Export options It allows us to indicate if we want to export all the elements of the original layer those that are selected or those that meet certain selected criteria In the latter case it lets us enter filter expressions Click on the Export button to finish the export 12 2 4 Export layer to a PostGIS format It allows us to export a vectorial layer to a PostGIS format The interface will guide through the export process Table and fields name options Some database require specially handle of the identifiers of table or fields containing mixed case or whitespace Translate identifiers to lowercase Translate spaces to 2015 gvSIG Page 88 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide
299. the and keys o To show or hide a grid as a background to better appreciate the images with transparency using the B key o To show the informative help using the H key or clicking on the question mark of the preview Preview 4 Central part It allows to visualize the information of the color table associated with the image in tabular form Table tab or gradient form Gradient tab e Tabular view Every row in the table corresponds to a range of pixel values and its associated RGB colour This association is established by range of values The column Value shows the first value of the range and the column Final shows the last value of the range These values can be edited directly by double clicking on the cell and typing a new value The RGB column contains the RGB value to be assigned to the range of pixel values The cells in this column are not editable but if you want to change the colour you can go to the corresponding cell in the Colour column and click on it The Class column contains associated labels that will not have any effect on O 2015 gvSIG Page 219 of 371 NT gvSIG 2 2 User guide Es gvSIG P asociaci n the calculation and are just meant to add descriptive names to the range of values this name will appear in the map legend Finally the column labelled Alpha shows a transparency selection dialog To manage the rows on the table you can use the general table c
300. the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Length of B axis point that opens a window for entering the coordinates or Length of B axis value that opens a window for entering the value of the length of the second axis 28 12 Insert polygon To draw irregular polygons indicating the different points vertex straight lines and archs This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Insert point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Insert point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 2 Between one point and the other one it s possible to indicate if the join will be 2015 gvSIG Page 195 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide er asociacion Es gvSIG P with a line or an arch from the console command or with the context menu selecting Arch mode or Line mode 3 Finish To close the polygon from the console command or from the context menu selecting Finish 28 13 Insert polyline To draw polylines indicating the different points vertex straight lines and archs This tool is available from the Layer Insert menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Insert point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the
301. tion gvSIG asociacion C 3D plugin offers to users several tools to create 3D views from 2D views In 3D View there are the main tools related to 3D plugin They also have the corresponding button bar Menu Button bar View Map Tools Window Help im a A ka Set all layers to k RA TOS Navigation New layer Add layer AR O 3D View MO Spherical 3D view Locair Eep Flat 3D view Properties Syr Let see every tool available Icon Tool Description wh Spherical 3D view Create a Spherical 3D view from active 2D view Mm Flat 3D view Create a Flat 3D view from active 2D view Synchronize view Synchronize 3D view with associated 2D view Lill Synchronize viewport Synchronize 3D viewport with associated 2D view viewport E Full screen mode Indicate full screen mode to active 3D view O 2015 gvSIG Page 302 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG asociaci n 53 2 3D View The default 3D view is displayed like this SAno K TE U Em Altitude 19 070 km 3D view is composed by five components 1 Minimap it shows what area of the Earth is being shown and the center point of 3D view 2 View controller It is composed by nine buttons The first button allows user to move the viewport the first pair of buttons allows user to increase or decrease zoom the second pair of buttons allows user to rotate viewport the third pair of
302. tomatically the projection of the view to the raster Available from the geographic transformations button bar and in geoprocessing toolbox 37 4 Georeferencing Allows provide a reference system ground coordinates to a digital image that is in a pixel coordenadades rows and columns This process requires a search for homologous points between the reference view or coordinate file and the final map The result is a transformation involves scaling rotation and deformation of the original image to fit the final map Available from the geographic transformations button bar The initial interface is as follows 2015 gvSIG Page 240 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n 0 georeferencing Georeferencing type O Without reference cartography With reference cartography lasc Georeferencing file ee ET Output file home alvaro NewLayer_2 tit Select Georeferencing algorithm Afin transformation 0 Polinomial transformation Accept Cancel e Initially we must decide what type of georeferencing will apply with Without reference cartography or With reference cartography Both types have the same georeferencing working environment with the difference that in one of them the image points relate georeferenced with points of a View and another with a list of coordinates without reference cartography e Georeferencing file It indicates the file containing the image to be geo
303. translation of gvSIG put in contact with us through the email address translations qvsig arg If you change the active locale it won t be used until the app is restarted Icon Packs Although by default only has a set of icons installed gvSIG is prepared to apply different sets of icons to your interface Web Browser Selects the default web browser will use gvSIG to those tools that require it a Select one of the known web browsers Firefox Run a custom command le firefox url where url will be the URL to load Skin Although there is only one default skin available gvSIG is prepared to apply different skins that change the look of the application Map It allows you to customize preferences Map work with documents 2015 gvSIG Page 37 of 371 quee eee gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n C Grid and ruler Horizontal grid spacing Centimeters Vertical grid spacing Centimeters Visualize grid Active grid Activate ruler User interface Show the page config dialog when layout document is created Show table of contents TOC for Layout views Notification Set the mode of notification of findings with a message on the status Modes bar or opening a window with information about the incident To restart gvSIG to apply the changes New layer It allows you to dial the formats available for layering GvSIG default gi
304. ts and the total and are useful for proportions and relations Bars The bars chart has two or more parallel rectangles each of them represents an attribute value These charts are useful to compare quantities or to show trends Tha bars can be orientated horizontally or vertically XY The XY chart or linear graph has one or more lines which connect values of succesive attributes The linear graphs are useful for showing trends in values within a continuous scale The lines can be orientated horizontally or vertically Temporary To create plots with temporary data The Chart tools are available from the Chart menu and their relevant button bars Menu Button bars 2015 gvSIG Page 343 of 371 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide L asociaci n Chart Create plot Edit ii Ll e ls bs ls Export to PDF El Export to PNG Let s see all the available tools Icon Tool Shortkey Description he Create plot To create a new plot in one Chart document VA Edit plot To edit the properties of one plot in one Chart document i Export to PDF To export a Chart document to PDF fl Export to PNG To export a Chart document to PDF 72 2 Create Charts To create Charts in a gvSIG project from the Project manager 1 Select the Charts icon 2 Click on New The Chart document will open as an empty document where new plots can be added By default the new C
305. tsneateateatsntseesataneantaneas 100 14 8 CODY CURT Paste lo VO Sierras E 101 2015 gvSIG Page 4 of 371 Es gvSIG P gvSIG 2 2 User guide er asociacion 14 9 GOUDS OF a VO Siria pdas 101 14 10 Rename a layY8eT occcccocococccconoconcononanancononanrononnrannnronarnnronrnarannnnnnnnnnnnnns 101 15 LAYER PROPER UES iswsssisirierisireeentsatiianeierenrrarntieninemenennans 103 15 1 AERO AUCH PP O E ESOPO EU PEO E 103 16 VECTOR LAYER PROPER ES iras 104 LS Genet lr as 104 A 1 VOSA aerie mu e E ES 104 LO Metodo laringe pao IR 105 EF VECTOR SYMBOLOGY siria ist 106 LF MAO O Ns 106 17 2 Unique SY MDOL iviorciririana irradia ed 107 17 3 Categories Unique ValueS oococcocococccconocononconononcnconnnonconrnnnnarnnnnnnnannnnrs 107 17 4 Categories EXPreSSIONS ccccceceececeeeceeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeateesaeeeeeneeteanes 109 17 5 Quantities DOU OCA SIN ari ii a 110 170 QUANEIIOS INterValS iros aliaron 111 17 7 Quantities Graduated SyMbOlS cococccconccccccconononcononanconononanconanannnnananes 113 17 8 Quantities Proportional SYMDOIS ccccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeesneeneass 114 17 9 Multiple attributes Bars ccccccccceseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeaeaeeaeetsesneeneanes 114 17 10 Multiple attributes PICS comino ar 116 17 11 Multiple attributes Quantity by CateQory ococcccccccccconcnnacnncnannnnnnnnnos 117 17 12 Multiple attributes Join Table oo ocococonoccononcncccononcncononannon
306. ttri DUCES race ets cio 327 61 TABLE EDITO Noia is 328 Oll THO GUCH Ol o EE RA aein 328 2015 gvSIG Page 12 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp lasociaci n eZ da COIN rara 328 To add a new column to the table o ococcccccnccnncnnnnncnn cnn anar rn n nr nn 328 OL CON Manon ada 329 AS ee al o ES o APP eer ee an ae AEN 329 O2 EXPORT TAB EE ura add 332 02 1 EXPO CADIS is asoruumizs cesen dss rener jode idehedes terior io 332 MAPS 63 MAPA rro a 334 64 INTERFAZ DEL MAPA snnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 335 65 ELEMENTOS CARTOGRAFICOSG scceecceceeeccuceeessuneeeeeeeessseaas 336 66 ELEMENTOS GR FICOS ccococoocncnocnnrnnrnnnncnnrnnrncnnrnnr nr nra narran 337 67 HERRAMIENTAS DE NAVEGACION cccceecccecccccccccccceceeeeeeees 338 68 HERRAMIENTAS DE DISENO ccccccscccccccceeececcccccccceceeeeseeeens 339 69 HERRAMIENTAS DE EDICION cccccccccccececeecceccccccccccceeeeeeeeess 340 70 HERRAMIENTAS DE EXPORTACI N E IMPRESION sceeeeeeess 341 71 PLANTILLAS DE MAPA ssaausssnnnnunsnunnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 342 CHARTS 72 DOCUMENT SRAPHIO Sara ra 343 FZ los MOUCHO ricardo E aS 343 DZ A a cna E O RA 344 PASE A e EP O IE EE 344 72 4 EQU DIOES PROD CITC Sarria 348 ADDONS TS PUBLISHING osito 352 Plax algo Lo lea o q ater seeerseae escent deca Elo a 352 73 2 EXPOrt VIEW to Maple israelita 352 73 3 Manual edition of Specific attributes ococcococcccocenononcononnncnnnn
307. ture line SyMbol ooocccococcccococoncocononaccncononanronononanroronannannnes 144 20 6 Editor Simple All SYMDO Iniivorsioiandalbasnadicoivaa ibarra si 145 20 7 Editor Picture fill SyMbol ococococccconcccccoconononcnconancnrononannnconnnanrnnannnes 145 20 8 Editor Marker fill SyMbol ocococococccconococconononaccnconacnnrononaranrnnanannnas 147 21 SYMBOL LIBRARIES isc tar 148 A e O PE o EEE weaainsaes 148 21 2 Collective Mapp sra aretes 148 PAPE COlO UNG EAT EA ATE A E TE tienen E E N 149 7 o ana e A O E E ES 149 21 5 Crime Mapping Symbology CMS cccccececececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteeeeneaneaneas 150 As AP e UA arcu 151 iy FOO y NA E ol o A 151 A A 152 AE e PO RU OOO 152 ZA LO O VS BI I aAa aa da aaa iaa 153 Mee Apes NAIVE A e 0 OPA 153 Zi L 2 MU APP O ar E R E E E 154 Zi La INAV IG atl OM iere renr E EER 154 2 LA NUDE one A T A 155 21 15 a ninnaa AA ETR 155 ZLO O Dle AE E EEE E AE NE 156 2L LA POLC e e E E E T A ES 156 ZLO WONO E EE EE E 157 22 CREATE SYMBOL LIBRARIES sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 158 22 1 Import picture Marker SyMboOlS ocococccconcccccocencnocconanaccononannannnnnannanon 158 22 2 Create package SYMDOIS cccccecececeeeseeeeceeeseeeeeeeesesteneaeaeeaeaneaneaneaes 159 23 NAVIGATION TOOLS sssssssssnunnsssnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 162 2015 gvSIG Page 6 of 371 Es gvSIG P gvSIG 2 2 User guide naaid asociaci n A Sede MO C
308. ture of the layers and to display their name 5 Name that the layer will have in the TOC 6 Click on Next You can select several layers at once by holding down the Control key whilst left clicking on the mouse You will obtein a layer description if you move the cursor over a layer and wait for a few seconds The information the server has about these layers is shown If we add a folder the WMS will have all the layers in that folder 2015 gvSIG Page 60 of 371 ND O DTT gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide dai asociaci n 4 Styles It allows you to choose between the different types of styles Symbology that are available It can happen that there is only one defined style or that the tab is disabled Information Layers Styles Dimensions Formats Selected layers 5 6 Active Fires 1 month Terra MODIS RGB Style i D Grayscale Style 1 Click on Next 5 Dimensions It helps to configure the value for the WMS layer dimensions However the dimensions property like the styles property is optional and may be disabled Information Layers Styles Dimensions i Formats Settings Settings editor TIME Value 2004 09 06 A gt iq 567190 O Single value CO Multiple value O Interval Add Clear Set Server Type WMS 1 3 0 Previous Next 1 Initially no dimension is configured It allows users to select one from the Setting
309. type of layer selects the direction to be applied to the buffer Outside external Inside internal e Options Multi layer selection Activating the check box selection the buffer is applied to all layers that are multi layer 25 3 Select by layer You can select features based on their poistion in relation to other layer s feature s by using several selection methods This tool is available from the Selection menu through this interface Selection by Layer Select items from active layers that are New set same as Add to set i E el Selected items of a layer i Select from set i l relieve_andalucia Cancel 1 Select the active layers and by the dropdown list define the selection method O 2015 gvSIG Page 175 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide 69 gvSIG lasociaci n same as same as disjoint as intersected with in contact with Cross over Contain Cantained in Over The location selection methods include Same as Select the features that are the same in another layer Two elements are considered equal if their geometries are exactly the same Layers type must be the same They are disjoint as Select features in a layer that are different from other layers Two features are considered different if their geometries are not exactly the same Intersected with Select the entities that are completely or partially overlapped with the source features In contac
310. u and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To end the selection press Enter 2 Tolerance It is the maximum distance between two lines which define the geometry of the three sequential nodes and the line of the simplified geometry from joining the first and the last of those nodes You can enter the value by using 2015 gvSIG Page 186 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n the console command or with the context menu that opens a window for entering the value 27 12 Join geometries To join various geometries in one unique geometry This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To end the selection press Enter 27 13 Insert autopolygon To insert one polygon next to other existing elements without drawing the common borders This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select one tool for inserting polygons and draw the autopolygon 27 14 Stretch geometry To stretch one geometry moving the selected vertex This tool is available from the Layer Modif
311. u to open all format types vector and raster archives databases and remote services and represent them spatially in the different coordinate systems You can apply all kind of legends and labels to represent your data e To design maps to print gvSIG has tools to easily design maps allowing you to add all type of cartographic elements and offering different options to print and export your new map e Edition It offers a huge range of tools to edit either cartographic data or alphanumeric e Analysis GvSIG has tools to facilitate the analysis of the existent data either cartographic or alphanumeric data More than 300 geoporcessing tools ara avaliable in gvSIG e To customize gvSIG Apart from having the option to extend the funcionality of gvSIG through Java it has a scripting module using Python 2015 gvSIG Page 26 of 371 ae OO lll gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide ss i asociacion 4 FINDING OUT ABOUT GVSIG gvSIG allows to work with different types of documents These documents allow to work with data from different points of view data aS a map as a alphanumeric table as graphics Each document has a serie of menus and buttons When we save a session or project in gvSIG this is saved ina file with a extension gvsproj 4 1 Interface Let s see the main components of the gvSIG interface E Ap Table Charts Session properties Session name Untitled Saved in
312. ures of a multiple selection you must hold down the Control key and click over them The selected features are displayed in yellow In the Preferences of the View it is possible to change the default color of the selection 25 2 Select by buffer Permite realizar una selecci n por rea de influencia a partir de uno o mas elementos seleccionados Crea reas de influencia utilizando la distancia de rea de influencia en torno a las entidades fuente elementos seleccionados de partida y devuelve todas las entidades que intersectan las reas de influencia Allows to perform a buffer selection from one or more selected features lt creates buffer areas using the distance of an influence area around the source elements starting selected features and produce as output all the features intersecting the areas of influence This tool is available from the Selection menu on the corresponding button bar There must be at least one element selected from a layer The resulting selection is applied to the active layers This is the user interface 2015 gvSIG Page 174 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide Select by buffer Width Width 100 Units mo o Side Polygon Outside Point ouside o Multipoint Outside Options Multi layer selection OK Cancel e Width width of the area of the buffer e Unit measurement unit selectable via a drop down list gvSIG asociaci n e Side Depending on the
313. users to synchronize the viewport of 3D view and the viewport of associated 2D view When a 3D view is created it is linked with the 2D view This permits to get the viewport of 2D view and indicates it to 3D view Moreover If we have two 3D views open at the same time both 3D views will be synchronized 54 5 Full screen mode This tool allows users to indicate full screen mode to activate 3D view To Indicate full mode it is necessary to have one 3D view active If one 3D view is activated just do click on menu or bar button and full screen 3D view will be created To close full screen window press ESC key 2015 gvSIG Page 306 of 371 A 8 Te Eo gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 55 3D PROPERTIES 55 1 General 3D preferences 3D Plugin has the next general preferences Preferences sia Annotation preferences Export to Flatness acs en Height width ce Grid ae Limit rows in memory dor slats ic a Map g Show atmosphere an i l ro Show north indicator Modos de notificacion I i Network Show minimap dl il al Show stars background Printed map units Raster y Show scale aDDi I eps View port animation Symbols Tile Cache Cache View Path to the files of cache home lmarques qvSIG Worldwind A jCRS Remove cache Restore defaults Accept Cancel General 3D preferences are divided into three parts 1 Size default dimensions of new 3D views 2 Co
314. ust It allows users to adjust the ranges to the maximum and minimum values of the image If this is turned off the colour table will be applied to the whole range of values which is O to 255 by default e Middle distance It will result in break points that all hold the same distance between them At the same time the first and last values of the range of pixel values will be modified accordingly in the tabular view e Save as default The current colour table will be set as the default colour table for this image The colour table information will be saved as a metadata file rmf with the image and the next time that the image is loaded in a gvSIG view it will have this colour table associated with it by default 34 4 Information by point It shows a window with the pixel information when clicking on it on the raster layer It is available in the raster toolbar and in the generic toolbar 2015 gvSIG Page 220 of 371 2 gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide The interface is the following one g InfoByPoint Hereu x Layer list valencia2002 J Coordinates Latitude 4373995 1 Longitude x 729904 5 View 133 140 Pixel point 32575 66 9806 63 Colors RGB 208 204 203 CMYK 0 0 0192 0 024 0 1843 HSL 9 13 206 In some cases such as WMS layers this window can have aditional information about the type of layer 34 5 Area of interest This tool allows to define regions of interest
315. utton or in its Background 17 9 Multiple attributes Bars To represent numeric values of one element using bar charts It s useful when there are few categories The interface contains 2015 gvSIG Page 114 of 371 9 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n Fields as h 12 Color Field label Background POB ios 014 014 show pvivienz 15 65 15 55 Colar Viviendas 1 GA 66_ ll IDensidad oor E T UB 00 I j l I Sd I Ii I l l l I i I I l l I l l i Dimension Color schema i i 2 6 Size _ Only rows selected 1 Fields List of all the available numeric field to be part of the chart 2 Colour scheme Drop down menu to choose the colour scheme which will be used in the chart by default 3 Buttons to add remove all the fields or the selected ones The selected fields in 1 will be added in 7 The selected fields in 7 can be removed and will appear again in 1 4 Background symbol If show is not active the background will be transparent 5 Show chart axis 6 Size It opens a new window to set up the chart size These are the options o Fixed height All charts will have the same size o Sum of field values The size of the bars will be indicated by the sum of all the records for the fields making up the chart and it will be represented in a proportional way o Field size depending on one fie
316. ve duplicate labels which will place a label by entity and if this is repeated it will only show one Visualization To set up the display scale range of the labels It is possible to use the same scale range specified for the labels General tab in layer properties or specify a range only to be applied for the labels 2015 gvSIG Page 131 of 371 A a gvSIG asociacion e gvSIG 2 2 User guide Scale Range Specify the range of scales at which labels will be shown 2 Use the same scale range as the feature layer O Dont show labels when zoomed Out beyond 1 1 M Max scale In beyond 1 1 Min scale Label overlapping If this is enabled all the labels will be drawn even if they overlap If this is not checked the labels will be drawn without ovelap and can not showw all existing ones 2015 gvSIG Page 132 of 371 Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide asociaci n 19 RASTER LAYER PROPERTIES 19 1 Information Provides general information about the raster layer such as the file path number of bands pixel size and geographic coordinates of the corners Dataset information Fille Mhome falvarofTestdatafrasterfan bouldr tm lan Size 8 52 MB 8 932 268 bytes Width x Height 1071 0 X 1390 0 Format null Georeferancing yes Bands number 6 Bands in file 6 Data type Byte Provider type
317. ve or rename fields This tool is available from the Table menu and its relevant button bar The interface Is 0 Field Manager The fields can be added deleted or renamed Field name Type Length Decimal count Default value a scalerank Integer 4 0 0 ee featurecla String 30 O Rename field LABELRANK Double 6 2 0 0 Delete field SOVEREIGNT String 32 0 ee ae SOV A3 String 3 0 ADMO DIF Double 4 2 0 0 LEWEL Double 4 2 0 0 TYPE string 17 0 ADMIN string AQ 0 ADMO A3 String 3 0 GEOU DIF Double 4 2 0 0 GEOQUNIT String 40 0 GU_A3 string 3 0 Accept Cancel e List with all the fields of the table and with their characteristics e The available buttons allow to create rename or delete one field 61 4 Field calculator To make calculations with the fields of the table 2015 gvSIG Page 329 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide lasociaci n This tool is available from the Table menu and its relevant button bar It is possible to execute in all the records if none is selected or in the selected fields The interface is Calculate expression Field AREA KM2 Type Numeric value t Fleld Type Commands I I PROVINCIA ls Numeric jabs 1 COUNT O Strine acos CCAA 2 Who ae area AREA _KM2 asin PERIMETRO atan HABITANTES call Expression Column PERIMETRO Clear expression OK Cancel 1 Information about the selected Field or C
318. ven the option to Shapefile shp Raster It lets you modify the default settings for working with raster data 2015 gvSIG Page 38 of 371 eee gvSIG asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide General Preview automatically changing properties Number of classes Ask for coordinates when a raster without georeferencing is loaded Ask for projection when the raster loaded has different projection from view Load layers When load a DEM set Enhance O Color tables Default Paths Temporary tmp tmp andami Overviews Overviews Number Ratio 2 Algorithm Media Cache WARNING You mustn t to change this section if you re not sure what you are doing Size 25 Pages x Group 3 Page size Process blocks 512 Network It lets check the status of the Internet connection Metwork status Press button to test the connection Firewall Proxy If you connect to the Internet through a proxy this section allows you to set the connection parameters used gvSIG _ Use proxy HTTP server HTTP proxy server Po HTTP propor O Connect directly to Po Use proxy SOCKS server 2015 gvSIG Page 39 of 371 A gvSIG 2 2 User guide gvSIG asociaci n e Symbols Set the symbology that is applied by default when you add a vector layer Default color Fill m Alpha Default fill color Fill m Alpha Random
319. w all Type Normal od Clean Crear Tabla 8 962 923992 0 Remove edg 39 155 52592 0 O RGB 41 022 _32992 0 Hide statistics Close 2015 gvSIG Page 213 of 371 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide gt asociaci n 1 With this option you can select the data source with which the histogram is generated e Visualize data Displayable data from the raster is used The bands selector has just the R G and B values Every band will appear in the graphic with its corresponding colour red for R green for G and blue for B This is the default option when the histogram dialog is opened e Complete With this option the histogram for the whole raster is calculated The image bands will appear in the band selector Because of the amount of time that it would take to calculate the histogram for large images the histogram is only calculated once which allows that the access be much faster next times a histogram or other functions which need acces to the histogram data are requested The result of this calculation is in a new associated file with rmf extension it is generated in the folder in which the origin data of the image are if we remove the rmf file attached to the image this calculation will be lost 2 Type You can select one of the following types e Normal This is the histogram in which for every pixel value on the X axis the number of pixels is shown on the Y axis e Accumu
320. which you click Area Measure perimeters and areas You can draw a polygon on the map and get its area and perimeter Distance Measure distances on the map You can draw lines on the map and get its length 76 4 Export a View Lets you create a View from a portable view This is availble from the menu Vista portable Exportar a Vista A new window will open requesting the folder to save the file that make up the view Automatically a new View containing the portable view layers and its display characteristics is generated once the files are saved 76 5 Open the Source View Lets you open the View from which the portable view was generated Available from the menu Vista portable Abrir la Vista origen portable view Open the source view 2015 gvSIG Page 366 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp lasociaci n 76 6 Generate a distributable package You can generate a distributable package from a portable view This package contains both the portable view configuration as the data files used A portable view distributable package can be installed via the complement manager view Administrador de complementos Available from the menu Vista portable Generar paquete distribuible First a window requesting the file pathname will open After selecting a folder click on select target directory Seleccionar directorio de destino A warning message telling you that the file has been created will o
321. will be open and it is possible to change its characteristics The plot to edit must be selected in the table x Delete plot To delete a plot The plot to delete must be selected in the table 3 Up Down It allows to sort the viewing of the different plots The variables will be painted according to this classification 4 Advanced configuration It opens a new window for editing the general characteristics of the document 2015 gvSIG Page 349 of 371 0 ee gvSIG 2 2 User guide gvSIG asociacion C 5 O Main options Title is title visible Chan title rot CIC dL Title color N Background Preview Default title Cancel Accept 1 Title To add a title to the Chart document and configure its characteristics Plot Background Default transparent Message for an empty Chart visibility No data available for this chart Please define the data origins Chart area Xx of pixels Y of pixels width Of pixels Height of pixels 2 Plot To configure the characteristics of the Chart document background messages and area 2015 gvSIG Page 350 of 371 Es gvsic asociaci n gvSIG 2 2 User guide Legend Legend visibility Auto 16px Gr Legend position Orientation BOTTOM CENTER Co Coordinates X pixels pixels 3 Legend To define the characteristics of the legend O 2015 gvSIG Page 351 of 3
322. y menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To end the selection press Enter 2 Select one tool for inserting polygons and draw the polygon which allows to select the vertex to stretch The selected vertex will be shown 27 15 Extend line to object To extend one line to object This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 2015 gvSIG Page 187 of 371 69 gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide l sociaci n 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To end the selection press Enter 2 Select each line to extend When the mouse is over the line a result preview is shown at the time the lines are being selected they will be extended until the indicated objects in the previous step 3 Once all the lines have been extended press Esc to close the function 27 16 Split line with an object To split a line in a cutting edge defined by other objects This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of th
323. y introducing directly the value in the text box and pressing the Enter key Contrast Filter of Contrast Active Contrast e It modifies the value of the contrast of the layer It can be varied by moving the position of the slider or by introducing directly the value in the text box and pressing the Enter key Values from 255 to 255 Equalization Filter of Equalization Active It applies an equalization filter Border detection 2015 gvSIG Page 228 of 371 NN A gvSIG 2 2 User guide gvSIG asociacion C Sobel Filter of Sobel Active Threshold IZ PP Compare It detects the horizontal and vertical borders separately on a greyscale image The colour images become in RGB with grey levels The result is a transparent image with black lines and some colour residues Threshold values from 0 to 255 Compare option Roberts Filter of Roberts Active Threshold IA p Compare It obtains a good response to diagonal border It has good performance in terms of location The main disadvantage is that it is extremely sensitive to noise so that it has poor qualities in detection Threshold values from 0 to 255 Compare option Prewitt Filter of Prewitt Active Threshold g RA Compare It is really good at defining the borders because its matrix attacks these borders from 8 different sides this filter has 8 matrixes which are applied to every
324. ying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting Rotation centre that opens a window for entering the coordinates 3 Rotation angle You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the grades of the rotation angle using the console command or with the context menu that opens a window for entering the rotation angle Angle of rotation degree value Angle of rotation degree Point Cancel In the case of using the angle graphically a visual aid will be available indicating the value of the rotation angle 27 7 Duplicate geometry To copy and move existing geometries The duplicated geometries will keep the same attributes This tool is available from the Layer Modify menu and from the relevant button bar The steps are 1 Select the feature or features on which to apply the tool If there are selected features previously to the use of the tool the tool will be applied on these To end the selection press Enter 2 First point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the point using the console command or with the context menu by selecting First point that opens a window for entering the coordinates 2015 gvSIG Page 184 of 371 Es gvSIG gvSIG 2 2 User guide amp l sociaci n 3 Second point You can enter it graphically by clicking with the mouse specifying the coordinates of the po
325. ype attribution md title abstract online_resource access_constraints e Layer Properties definition of the MapFile attributes of each Layer O 2015 gvSIG Page 355 of 371 gvSIG 2 2 User guide Load Mapfile properties gvSIG asociacion C 35 Countries d Antarctica 4 Countries Reload form nF Style 1 Eu East Asia amp Pacific General layer NN aa a nf Style 1 l JE Latin America amp Caribbean Type Polygon 3 Style 1 Be E Middle East amp North Africa MapServer Options ka Style 1 Status Debug Metadata Countries Countries Countries Su Sub Saharan Africa Pan F Style 1 wms_name wms_abstract Connection Options ConnectionType Connection Data afvector shp Earth ne_10m_admin_0 countries shp There are similar ways to define the services of TinyOWS MapProxy and MapCache 73 4 Upload to server The publishing extension is able to upload to the server any project generated in local Visually the menu is very similar to the publishing tool except for the fact that all that refers to the generation of the project have disappeared because it will not generate the definition of any other service only it will upload an already existing one Therefore we only need to indicate the local project folder which we want to upload to the server and set the connection parameters The interface Is O 2015 gvSIG Page 356 of 371 Euge ee

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

freemont - Groupe Schumacher  Humminbird 500 Series GPS Receiver User Manual  GT15 RS-422 CONVERSION UNIT User`s Manual  softsuitcase 2010 dansk - ver. 7 - Soft SuitCase  Descarga el Manual de Usuario  インフォマート（2492）  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file